Cadillac 2004 SRX Specifications

2004 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-50
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-60
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-20
Mirrors .................................................... 2-34
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-39
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-40
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-45
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-48
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-52
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-26
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-36
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-52
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-94
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-47
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-48
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-49
Front Axle ............................................... 5-50
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-56
Tires
...................................................... 5-58
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-92
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-99
Electrical System .................................... 5-100
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-109
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath are registered
trademarks and the name SRX is a trademark of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25751862 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/06/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
{CAUTION:
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7
Stowable Seat ...............................................1-7
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-21
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-25
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-27
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-27
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-31
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38
Top Strap ....................................................1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-47
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-50
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-52
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-56
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-57
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-58
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-60
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-60
Restraint System Check ..................................1-60
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-61
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Manual Passenger Seat
If your vehicle is equipped with power front seats,
the controls are located on the outboard sides of the
front seat cushions.
Your vehicle may have a manual passenger seat.
To adjust the seat, lift the bar under the front of the
seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth
with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down
to adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down
to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
control to move the entire seat up or down.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
1-2
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this feature. The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback lumbar support can be adjusted
by moving a control located on the outboard side of
the seat cushions.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your seating
position changes, as it may during long trips, so
should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the
seat as needed.
Heated Seats
If your vehicle is equipped
with heated front seats, the
buttons are located on
the climate control panel.
There is a button for the driver and one for the front
passenger. Each button has the following three settings:
LO, HI and off. The active setting appears on the
climate control panel display. The LO setting warms the
seatback and cushion until the seat approximates
normal body temperature. The HI setting has a slightly
higher temperature.
To turn on the heated seats, press the button once.
The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press the button
again to switch to the LO setting. Pressing the button a
third time turns the system off.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. When the vehicle is turned off, the heated
seats automatically turn off. If you wish to have the
heated seats on once the vehicle is restarted, press the
button again.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
Power Recliner
Manual Recliner
If your vehicle has manual reclining front seatbacks,
the levers are located on the outboard sides of the
front seats.
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback in place. To return the seatback to the
upright position, pull up on the lever without pushing on
the seatback.
1-4
If your vehicle has power reclining front seatbacks,
the controls are located on the outboard sides of the
front seats.
Press the top of the vertical control forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback angle.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The front seat head restraints move up and down.
Press the button located at the bottom of the head
restraint and raise or lower the head restraint. The head
restraints tilt forward and rearward, also.
The second row outboard head rests work the same as
the front seat head restraints except they do not tilt.
The third row head rests are not adjustable. They are
removable. They must be removed before the third
row seat can be folded. To remove the third row head
rests, press the button located on the top of the
seatback and pull up on the head rest. Store the head
rests in the storage compartment behind the third
row. Open the cover and insert the head rest posts
through the slats in the carpet. Position and snap the
head rests in the provided storage tray.
1-6
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Adjusting the Second Row Seat
The second row seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Pull up on the lever under the seat cushion
and slide the seat with your body. Release the lever and
try to move the seat forward and rearward to be sure
it is locked into place.
Stowable Seat
If your vehicle has a third row seat, it is a power
folding seat.
The head rests need to be removed before folding the
third row seat. See Head Restraints on page 1-6 for
instructions for removing the third row seat head rests.
The seatback will not fold all of the way down if the
head rests are not removed.
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat
The passenger’s side of the second row seat has an
easy entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out
of the third row seat, if your vehicle has one.
To operate the seat, pull the release handle located on
the top of the seatback. Fold the seatback down
then pull the release handle on the top of the seatback
to release the seat to tumble forward.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position
when finished. Push and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked in place.
Inside Liftgate
The buttons that are used to operate the power folding
third row seat are located inside of the liftgate and
behind the second row seat on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
1-7
Two buttons are located inside the liftgate. One button is
to tilt the seatback forward for added storage space or
when storing a flat tire. The other button is the power
folding seat button. The button behind the second row
seat is also a power folding seat button. Use either of
these to fold the third row seat into a flat floor.
Before folding the third row seat you must have either
the liftgate or the rear passenger’s side door open,
the vehicle must be in PARK (P), the seatback panel
must be attached to itself, and the vehicle cannot have a
low battery.
To fold the seat press one of the power folding seat
buttons. Only press the button once. After the seat has
folded, the panel on the seat must be folded forward
to create the flat floor.
If the seat’s path is blocked it will stop and back away.
Press the button again to return the seat to its
previous position.
Before returning the third row seat to a seat position,
the panel must be folded back upon itself. Press one of
the power folding seat buttons and the seat will
unfold into the seating position.
1-8
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-40.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
1-9
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-11
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-14
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
1-16
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
1-18
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch
plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
1-21
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-22
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-23
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-24
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature. If not, you can get it
from your dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each of the rear outside
passenger positions in the second row. Here is how
to attach the comfort guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-25
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-22.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-26
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You’ll find
them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits
something.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-61.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-29
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint the belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-25.
1-30
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-32
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults and
older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-33
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-36
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-37
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear outside seat position including an
infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat outside position.
CAUTION:
1-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear
seat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-39
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-40
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under
it. See Head Restraints on page 1-6.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
The top strap anchors are located on the floor of the
vehicle behind the second row seat. There is one anchor
for each second row seat position. Do not use a child
restraint with a top strap in the right front passenger’s
position or in the third row, because there is no place to
anchor the top strap
1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find
anchors (A) for the second row outboard passenger
positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-42
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located near the base of the second row
outboard seating positions.
{CAUTION:
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be able
to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” in the
Index for information on how to secure a child
restraint in your vehicle.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-39. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-44
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-42. See Top Strap
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
There are no top strap anchors in the third row seating
positions. Do not secure a child restraint in the third
row if a national or local law requires that top strap be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
{CAUTION:
In a crash, a child secured in a rear-facing
child restraint in the center rear seating
position could be injured by the vehicle’s
armrest. To reduce this risk, the armrest
should first be secured with a special armrest
retention strap. You can get this from your
dealer.
Center Seat Armrest Retention Strap
Install the armrest retention strap following the
instructions that come with it.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-45
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-46
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-42. See Top Strap
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-47
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Power Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-48
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-49
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has six air bags:
• A frontal air bag for the driver and another frontal
air bag for the right front passenger,
• a seat mounted side impact air bag for the driver
and another for the right front passenger,
• a roof-mounted side impact air bag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• a roof-mounted side impact air bag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to
work with safety belts but don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in
moderate to severe crashes where the front of
your vehicle hits something. They aren’t
designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear or
low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants,
frontal air bags may provide less protection in
frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past.
CAUTION:
1-50
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
The seat-mounted side impact air bags and
roof-mounted side impact air bags are
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They aren’t designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone
in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
Always wear your safety belt even with frontal
air bags.The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-51
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-40
for more information.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-52
The front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-53
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-54
The roof-mounted side impact air bag for the driver and
the passenger directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
The roof-mounted side impact air bag for the front
passenger and the passenger directly behind the front
passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19
to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment
is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
1-56
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel, instrument panel, the side of the
front seatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts.
Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly
over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the
occupant more gradually. But the frontal air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air
bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal
collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags.
Air bags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only
in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions
for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions
for the side impact air bags.
1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module – the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the
seatback closest to the door for the seat-mounted side
impact air bags and the area along the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows – will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
The hazard warning flashers will also come on when
the air bags deploy. If you want to turn them off,
press the hazard warning flasher button twice.
1-58
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which
records information about the frontal air bag system.
The module system records information about the
readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment or near-deployment crash. The
module also records speed, engine RPM, brake and
throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, or the side impact air bag
covering on the ceiling near the side windows, the
bag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the air bag module in the steering wheel,
both the air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag, the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact air bags,
or side impact air bag module and ceiling covering
for the roof-mounted side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
1-59
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the air
bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are to close
to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape, yellow coverings or
yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-60
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: If I add a luggage carrier or sunroof to the roof
of my vehicle, will it keep the roof-mounted side
impact air bags from working properly?
A:
As long as the luggage carrier or sunroof is
properly installed so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
roof-mounted side impact air bags from working
properly in a crash.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need new
parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
1-61
✍ NOTES
1-62
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-9
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-11
Liftgate ........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-17
Immobilizer ..................................................2-18
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-23
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-29
Parking Brake ..............................................2-29
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-32
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-33
Mirrors ...........................................................2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® ...................................................2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-34
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-38
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-38
OnStar® System .............................................2-39
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-40
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-41
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-45
Glove Box ...................................................2-45
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-45
Cell Phone Storage Area ...............................2-45
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-45
Map Pocket .................................................2-45
Assist Handles .............................................2-45
Garment Hooks ............................................2-45
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-46
2-2
Convenience Net ..........................................2-47
Cargo Cover ................................................2-47
Cargo Management System ...........................2-47
Sunroof .........................................................2-48
Sunroof (UltraView) .......................................2-48
Sunroof (UltraView Plus) ................................2-50
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-52
Memory Seat and Mirrors ..............................2-52
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
2-3
One key works all of the
lock cylinders on the
vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-39
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer vehicle theft deterrent
system. The key has a transponder in the key head
that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer. The key will have
PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that
came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer
if you need a new key made.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
2-4
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors or
the liftgate and turn on your vehicle’s interior lamps
from about 10 feet (3 m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press this
symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to
lock the doors. This also
arms the theft-deterrent
system.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior lamps
will flash and/or the horn will sound when you lock
the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74 for more
information on programming this feature.
2-5
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work.
If a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
W(Unlock):
Press this symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door.
This also disarms the theft-deterrent system. Press the
button again to unlock the rest of the doors.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior lamps
will flash when you unlock the doors with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 for more information on
programming this feature.
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work.
If a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
L(Panic Alarm):
The remote keyless entry
transmitter comes equipped with an instant panic alarm.
Press the horn symbol when the ignition is turned off.
The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash for
up to 30 seconds. To stop the instant panic alarm,
press the symbol again or turn the ignition to ON.
2-6
The remote keyless entry transmitter can be used to
recall the memory settings for up to two drivers.
For more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-74 and Memory Seat and Mirrors on
page 2-52.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
or similar object to remove the old battery.
Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Press any button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors with the key or remote
keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.
If the windows are down and the doors are locked,
don’t reach in to manually unlock the vehicle because
you will set off the alarm.
From the outside, use either the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, use the
manual lock levers located
on the door panels near
the windows.
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
Central Door Unlocking System
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature. When
unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other
doors by holding the key in the turned position for a few
seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in the
lock cylinder.
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of
the doors.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the front door panels.
When the power door lock switch or the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed when
the key is not in the ignition and the driver’s door
is opened, a chime will sound three times indicating that
delayed locking is active.
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
You can press the door lock switch or the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter again to override
this feature and lock the doors immediately.
Press the bottom part of the power door lock switch to
lock or the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
You can turn this feature off using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors
will lock immediately when you press the power
door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-74 for more information.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
You must use the manual levers to lock and unlock
the rear doors when riding in the rear seat.
2-9
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Your vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The doors
will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move
the shift lever back into PARK (P).
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on
your vehicle from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must open
the rear doors to access
them.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,
it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or
the power door lock switch to lock the door.
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
on programming, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-74.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-10
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to disengage the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. If you
close the doors, you can lock them using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
The anti-lockout feature can be overridden by pressing
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
or by pressing the power lock switch a second time.
Leaving Your Vehicle
The rear door locks will now work normally.
If you are leaving your vehicle, open the door, lock the
vehicle from the inside; then get out and close the door.
2-11
Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in the
driver’s door cylinder counterclockwise or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. To lock the liftgate using the
key, turn the key clockwise in the driver’s door.
Open the liftgate using the handle located below the
license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise
by itself.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-26.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
(Continued)
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate open,
even slightly. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
2-12
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-13
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
This feature is on all the power windows. Press the
down arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-down feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is lowering, press the down arrow on
the switch again.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on both front power windows. Press the
up arrow on the switch to the second position to
activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop the
window as it is raising, press the up arrow on the
switch again.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
near each window. Press the up or down arrows on
the switches to raise or lower the windows.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off for up to 10 minutes.
For more information, see “Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)” under Ignition Positions on page 2-21.
2-14
Programming the Power Windows
Anti-Pinch Feature
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
If a hand, an arm or another object is above the middle
of the window and is in the path of the window when
the express-up feature is active, the window will stop at
the obstruction and express-open to a factory preset
position.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.
2. Press and hold the down arrow on the power
window switch until the window has fully opened.
3. Press the up arrow on the power window switch
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding up arrow on the switch for
approximately two seconds after the window
is completely closed.
{CAUTION:
Pressing and holding the power window
control will turn off the anti-pinch feature.
If this happens, a power window won’t stop
if something gets in the way. You or others
could be injured, and your window could be
damaged. Be careful not to press and hold the
power window control.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other front window.
2-15
Window Lockout
Sun Visors
This feature allows you to disable the passenger
window switches.
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
The passenger window
lockout button is located
below the power window
switches on the driver’s
door armrest.
The driver’s sunshade may also have buttons for a
built-in garage door opener. See HomeLink® Transmitter
on page 2-40 for more information.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. The light will
automatically come on. The light will go out when you
close the cover.
Press the button to disable the passenger window
controls. The light on the button will illuminate, indicating
that the feature is in use. The passenger windows still
can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the passenger windows, press the
button again. The light on the button will go out.
You can program this feature to disable all passenger
windows or only the rear passenger windows. See
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74 for more
information.
2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
3. Close all the doors. The security light should go off
within approximately 30 seconds.
If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or a
remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound
and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you lock the
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It
activates only if you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the power door lock.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the
following:
• The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if
you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security light
will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the power door lock switch.
The security light should come on and stay on.
keyless entry transmitter. Pressing the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door
any other way while the system is armed will
activate the alarm when a door or the liftgate is
opened.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by
using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with a valid key.
2-17
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter and
close the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds until
the security light goes off.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the exterior lamps will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with your key, using the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with
a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-100. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
2-18
Immobilizer
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system works when you turn the key to ON. The
key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle. The correct key will start
the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a special key that works with the
theft-deterrent system. There is a transponder in the key
head. If the key is ever damaged, you may not be
able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-100. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system to have a new key made.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for
the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional
keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service the theft-deterrent system
to have new keys made. To program additional keys
you will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
2-19
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start see
your dealer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
To program a new key do the following:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within ten seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed. It may not be apparent that the
security light went on due to how quickly the key is
programmed.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
2-20
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines for the first 500 miles
(805 km):
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
If these procedures are not followed, your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this break-in guideline every
time you get new linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-54 for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can
insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition,
steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent
feature.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off
the engine, but still turn the steering wheel.
C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle has
an automatic transmission and you turn off the
engine, the transmission will lock. If you need to shift
the transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition key has to
be in ON.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
2-21
Steering Column Ignition Lock Release
3. Insert a narrow, pointed object into the hole in the
steering column cover and press the spring.
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with
low voltage, you can still release the ignition lock and
remove the key. Use the following procedure to release
the steering column:
4. Then, turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove
the key.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned
from ON to OFF:
•
•
•
•
Radio
Power Windows
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or if
a door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition key
to ON and then back to OFF.
1. Locate the plastic screw head on the underside of
the plastic cover for the steering column.
2. Insert a flat, thin object into the slot and turn it until
the plastic piece detaches from the steering column
cover.
2-22
Starting Your Engine
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for short or very tall drivers.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the side of the steering
column.
Move the switch rearward to move the pedals closer to
your body. Move the switch forward to move the
pedals away from your body.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the engine
oil dipstick. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
2-24
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-30. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-54.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in ON.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-25
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) while pressing the button on the shift lever as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P)
on page 2-31.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission.
See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-45 for additional information.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-26
Notice: Shifting our of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Be sure the engine is not racing
when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you’re:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
Shift Lock Release
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, you can still shift the vehicle into PARK (P)
and remove the ignition key. Use the following
procedure to release the shift lever:
1. Use a tool to remove
the cap with the lock
symbol located
next to the shift lever.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2. Using a narrow, pointed tool, press down on the
mechanism under the cap so that you can move
the shift lever.
2-27
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change gears
similar to a manual transmission. To use the DCS
feature:
1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to the right DSC area.
When the transmission is
in DSC mode the sport
mode light in the
instrument panel cluster
will come on.
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
2-28
Also the odometer on the instrument panel cluster will
change to show gear range.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in
gear longer or to down shift for more power.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and rpm. The
transmission will not automatically shift to the next
higher gear if the engine rpm is too high.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, engine
power is sent to all four wheels all the time.
This is like four-wheel drive, but it is fully automatic.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
doesn’t, you need to have your vehicle serviced. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42 for more
information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-54 for more information.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-54.
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
• Press the button on the front of the shift lever as
you push the shift lever all the way toward the
front of your vehicle into PARK (P). Release the
button.
• With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake with your left foot.
See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more
information.
2-30
3. Turn the key to OFF.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it
with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the key
in your hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pushing the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means
that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-25 for more information.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the pressure
on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) while pushing the button on the shift lever
as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold the
pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try
the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. Open and
close the driver’s door to turn off the RAP feature.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-32
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-54.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-41.
2-33
Mirrors
Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror. The mirror also contains OnStar®
controls. For more information about OnStar®, see
OnStar® System on page 2-39.
O (On/Off):
This is the on/off button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror, for the automatic dimming
functions of the rearview mirror.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is active.
2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass. The mirror also contains
OnStar® controls. For more information about OnStar®,
see OnStar® System on page 2-39.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the
compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror, for the automatic dimming
and compass functions of the rearview mirror.
Mirror Operation
Compass Calibration
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass heading (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder or similar
object. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is active.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the current compass heading.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode by
pressing and holding the on/off button until a C is shown
in the compass display.
2-35
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, your compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. Stop pressing the button
and the mirror will return to normal operation.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-36
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
Press the left mirror symbol on the selector switch to
choose the driver’s side mirror or the right mirror symbol
to choose the passenger’s side mirror. The center
position is off and will not move the mirrors if the control
pad is touched.
Once you select the mirror you want to adjust, use the
arrows on the control pad to move the mirror in the
direction you want the mirror to go. Adjust each mirror
so you can see the side of your vehicle and the
area behind your vehicle.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
When you operate the rear window defogger, it also
warms both outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of fog or ice. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Climate Control System on page 3-26 for more
information.
The control on the driver’s door armrest operates both
outside rearview mirrors.
2-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
Your driver’s side mirror may have an automatic
dimming feature. This helps to reduce glare from the
headlamps of vehicles behind you.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seat and
mirrors, it will also be capable of performing the
curb view assist mirror feature. This feature will cause
the passenger’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). Use this
feature to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)
and a five-second delay has occurred, the passenger’s
mirror will return to its original position.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror controls can be used. See Outside Power
Heated Mirrors on page 2-37 for more information.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the DIC.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74 for
more information.
2-38
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-39
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
OnStar® Personal Calling
With OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or call
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,
entertainment and informative topics, such as traffic
and weather reports. You are able to listen and reply to
your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
You can use the steering wheel controls to interact
with the OnStar® system. See the OnStar® manual
provided with your vehicle for more information.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-124.
2-40
HomeLink® Transmitter
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control buttons
are located on the
driver’s sun visor.
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
2-41
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
2-42
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not
repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”
to complete.
2-43
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®.”
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-44
Storage Areas
Glove Box
The glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seat
on the instrument panel. To lock the glove box door,
insert your key into the lock cylinder and turn it
clockwise. Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the
door.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas,
and accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the
console.
Map Pocket
There are map pockets located near the bottom of the
front doors.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has cupholders located between the front
seats. Slide the cover back to expose them. There
are also cupholders in the armrest of the second row
seat. Press the panel on the front of the armrest
to expose the cupholders. On the outboard sides of the
third row there may also be cupholders.
Cell Phone Storage Area
Assist Handles
Your vehicle has assist handles located above the
doors.
Garment Hooks
Your vehicle has garment hooks located between the
rear doors and the liftgate.
Your vehicle has a closeable cell phone/sunglasses
storage area inside both of the front doors. Press
the button to open the door.
2-45
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
2-46
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side
rails attached to the roof. You can get sliding crossrails
through your dealer to use for tying things down.
These let you load some things on top of your vehicle,
as long as they are not wider or longer than the
luggage carrier.
Convenience Net
Cargo Management System
The convenience net attaches to the floor or back wall of
the rear of the vehicle using six anchor points. The net
can be used like a hammock across the rear of the
vehicle or hooked on the floor. Put small loads, like
grocery bags, behind the net. It can help keep them from
falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
Your vehicle may have a cargo management system.
It provides extra storage space for the rear of the
vehicle.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.
The cargo management system has three compartments.
The one closest to the front of the vehicle opens from
behind the second row. The center compartment has a
divider. The compartment closest to the rear of the
vehicle has a removable storage bin.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover from
the passenger’s side to the driver’s side and slide the
ends into the slots to secure it. When it is not in
use, take the ends out of the slots and allow the cover
to roll back up.
2-47
Sunroof
Sunroof (UltraView)
{CAUTION:
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse
injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle
or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured
or killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant,
in any motor vehicle, but if you have the
Ultraview roof it is, if anything, even more
important. In a rollover or other crash, the
Ultraview roof can be damaged or destroyed.
People who are unbelted would then be at
even greater risk of being ejected from the
vehicle. Always fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passengers’ belts are fastened
properly too.
Your vehicle may have a single sunroof over the first
two rows of seats.
The sunroof /sunshade
switches are located in the
headliner between the
driver and front passenger.
One switch operates the sunroof and the other switch
operates the sunshade.
Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the
sunroof. If you press the switch to the first detent the
sunroof will express open to a comfort stop. Press
the switch to the second detent to express open the roof
all of the way. Press the front of the switch to close
the sunroof. The first detent will close it manually and
the second detent will express close the roof.
Press the back of the sunshade switch to open the
sunshade. Press the front of the switch to close
the sunshade. The sunshade can not be closed further
than the glass panel.
2-48
Anti-Pinch Feature
3. Release both buttons.
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is closing,
the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the
sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof will then reverse. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened, remove the obstruction and press the front of
the sunroof switch.
4. Press the sunshade switch in the close position
until the motor stalls in the closed position.
Resynchronization
To resynchronize the glass and sunshade, do the
following.
5. Press the sunroof switch in the open position until
the motor stalls in the open position.
6. Within three seconds the sunroof close switch must
be pressed three times.
The sunroof and sunshade will begin opening and
closing. When that is complete, the glass and
the sunshade will be resynchronized.
1. Close the sunroof and sunshade.
2. Press and hold the sunroof switch in the open
position and the sunshade switch in the close
position for six seconds after the sunroof and
sunshade are fully closed. The sunroof will start
to open.
2-49
Sunroof (UltraView Plus)
{CAUTION:
People who are in a crash and not wearing a
safety belt properly can suffer much worse
injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle
or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured or
killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant, in
any motor vehicle, but if you have the Ultraview
roof it is, if anything, even more important. In a
rollover or other crash, the Ultraview roof can
be damaged or destroyed. People who are
unbelted would then be at even greater risk of
being ejected from the vehicle. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your
passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
Your vehicle may have a single sunroof over the first
two rows of seats and a smaller sunroof over the
third row seat.
The sunroof /sunshade
switches are located in the
headliner between the
driver and front passenger.
One switch operates the front sunroof and the another
switch operates the front sunshade. The third switch
is for the rear sunroof and the fourth switch is for
the rear sunshade.
Press the back of the front sunroof switch to open the
front sunroof. If you press the switch to the first detent the
sunroof will express open to a comfort stop. Press the
switch to the second detent to express open the roof all of
the way. Press the front of the switch to close the sunroof.
The first detent will close it manually and the second
detent will express close the roof.
2-50
Press the back of the front sunshade switch to open the
front sunshade. Press the front of the switch to close
the sunshade. The sunshade can not be closed further
than the glass panel.
The rear sunroof is a vent only roof. Press the rear of
the switch to vent the roof. Press the front of the switch
to close it.
Press the back of the rear sunshade switch to open the
rear sunshade. Press the front of the switch to close
the rear sunshade. The sunshade cannot be closed
completely when the glass is open.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse. To close the
sunroof once it has re-opened, remove the obstruction
and press the front of the sunroof switch.
Resynchronization
To resynchronize the front and rear glass and sunshade,
do the following.
1. Close the sunroof and sunshade.
2. Press and hold the rear sunroof switch in the open
position and the rear sunshade switch in the close
position for six seconds after the sunroof and
sunshade are fully closed.
3. Release both buttons.
4. Press the rear sunroof switch in the closed position
until the motor stalls in the closed position.
5. Press and hold the front sunroof switch in the open
position and the front sunshade switch in the close
position for six seconds after the sunroof and
sunshade are fully closed. The sunroof will start
to open.
6. Release both buttons.
7. Press the sunshade switch in the close position
until the motor stalls in the closed position.
8. Press the sunroof switch in the open position until
the motor stalls in the open position.
9. Within three seconds the sunroof close switch must
be pressed three times.
The sunroof and sunshade will begin opening and
closing. When that is complete, the glass and
the sunshade will be resynchronized.
2-51
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat and Mirrors
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the driver’s
seating and outside rearview mirror driving positions for
up to two drivers.
The buttons for this feature
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Use the following steps to program the buttons:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner and both outside mirrors.
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seat and
mirror positions have been saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the stored
driving positions.
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to recall
the stored setting. Each time a memory button is
pressed, a single beep will sound.
Three chimes will sound and the setting will not be
recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicle is
not in PARK (P).
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter or when you place the
key in the ignition, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-74.
2-52
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat or mirror controls.
Two personalized exit positions can also be
programmed. Use the following steps to program exit
positions:
1. Press memory seat button 1 or the button with the
unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter with the number 1 on the back to recall
the driving position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button located above
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest
for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit
position has been saved.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
memory seat button 2 or the remote keyless
entry transmitter with the number 2 on the back.
To recall the stored exit positions, press and release the
exit button. One beep will sound, and the seat will
move to the previously stored exit position for the
currently identified driver. If an exit position has not
been stored for this driver, the seat will move all the way
back. The position of the outside mirrors is not stored
or recalled for the exit position.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit
positions.
Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will not be
recalled if you press the exit button when the vehicle
is not in PARK (P).
If you would like your stored exit position to be recalled
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter or when the ignition is turned off and
the driver’s door is opened, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74.
2-53
✍ NOTES
2-54
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-7
Horn .............................................................3-7
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8
Windshield Wiper Lever .................................3-15
Cruise Control ..............................................3-18
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-18
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-21
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-22
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-24
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-25
Climate Controls ............................................3-26
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-26
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-32
Rear Air Conditioning System .........................3-34
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-35
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-36
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-37
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-38
Tachometer .................................................3-39
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-40
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-40
Charging System Light ..................................3-41
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-42
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-43
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-44
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ........3-44
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-45
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-45
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-46
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-48
Sport Mode Light ..........................................3-49
Security Light ...............................................3-49
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-50
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-50
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-50
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-50
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-51
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-52
System Controls ...........................................3-52
Status of Vehicle Systems .............................3-53
DIC Main Menu ............................................3-61
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-65
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-74
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-94
Setting the Time ...........................................3-94
Radio with CD ..............................................3-95
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-111
Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3-112
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-124
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-124
DVD Distortion ............................................3-126
3-2
Understanding Radio Reception ....................3-126
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-127
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-127
Cleaning Your DVD Player ...........................3-127
Cleaning the Video Screen ...........................3-127
Diversity Antenna System .............................3-128
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(48 Contiguous US States) ........................3-128
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-32.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.
C. Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-124.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-37.
E. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wiper
Lever on page 3-15.
F. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
G. Audio/Navigation System. See Audio System(s) on
page 3-94.
H. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
I. Automatic Transmission Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-25.
J. Climate Control System. See Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-26.
K. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-45.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning button
is located in the center of
the instrument panel,
between the two air vents.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. The light in the center of the
button will flash, indicating that the hazard warning
flashers are on. Press the button again to turn
the flashers off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-6
When the hazard warning flashers are on, neither your
turn signals nor your Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
will work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
Horn
Press on the pad near the horn symbols on the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is
complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamps
Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer
Flash-To-Pass Feature
Fog Lamps
Cruise Control
For more information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-18.
3-8
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns to its original
position when it’s released.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other driver’s won’t see the signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-100 for more
information.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-To-Pass Feature
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km), a
warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal On
message will appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On Message” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for more
information.
This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever to
change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull the
lever back and then release it to change from high
to low beam.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will be on,
indicating high-beam
usage.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When you do, the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are either off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on
as long as you hold the lever there. Release
the lever to turn them off.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push
the lever away from you.
3-9
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
O(Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O (On/Off):
Turn the control to this position to turn off
all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
3-10
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Wiper-Activated Headlamps
Fog Lamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
about six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior
lamp control must be in AUTO.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
When the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking
lamp position and the windshield wiper control is in any
position except off, the Headlamps Suggested
message will appear on the DIC display. See
“Headlamps Suggested Message” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-65 for more information.
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also
turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
Headlamps On Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
-:
The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog
lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on the
lever up to the dot and release it. The band will
return to its original position.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the for lamp band up to
the dot and release it. The band will return to its original
position, and the fog lamps will turn off. If you turn on
the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps will also
turn off. They’ll turn back on again when you switch back
to low-beam headlamps.
3-11
Cruise Control
These controls are located
on the end of the
multifunction lever.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
• Cruise control can be dangerous where
9(Off):
R(On):
This position turns the system off.
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to accelerate when cruise is already active.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
3-12
•
you can not drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control
system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9 and Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
you may turn the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on
while cruise control is on.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-13
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-14
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake to keep
your speed down. Applying the brake will take you out of
cruise control. If you need to apply the brake due to
the grade of the downhill slope, you may not want
to attempt to use your cruise control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise
control session only. Move the cruise control switch
to off to turn off the system completely.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Windshield Wiper Lever
9 (Off):
Put the lever in this position to turn off the
wipers.
Windshield Wipers
& (Delay):
Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7 (Mist):
Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
3-15
6 (Low Speed):
Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
Windshield Washer
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
{CAUTION:
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
See “Wiper-Activated Headlamps” listed previously for
more information.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-56.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-16
The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.
K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this symbol
located at the end of the windshield washer lever to
wash the windshield. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, press and
hold the button.
If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the Check Washer
Fluid message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-65 for more information.
If the headlamps are on when you wash the windshield,
the headlamp washers (if equipped) will turn on. Both
the windshield and the headlamps will be washed.
See “Headlamp Washers” following for more information.
Headlamp Washers
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers. The
headlamp washers clear the headlamp lenses so that
you can get the maximum visibility and brightness from
your headlamps.
Rear Washer/Wiper
The switch for the rear
washer/wiper is located in
the overhead console.
The headlamp washers are located to the inside of the
headlamps.
Pressing the top of the switch or the bottom of the
switch will put the rear wiper on a delay. Pressing the
center of the switch will wash the rear window.
3-17
The headlamps must be on in order to be washed.
If the headlamps are off, only the windshield will
be washed when the washer button is pressed.
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever. Both
the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.
See “Windshield Washer” listed previously for more
information.
Cruise Control
The controls to operate the cruise control are located on
the turn signal/multifunction lever. See “Cruise Control”
under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8
for information.
Exterior Lamps
Headlamps
See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8 for
more information on the headlamps.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON or
START,
• the exterior lamp control is in OFF or AUTO with
the headlamps off, and
• an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P) or the
parking brake is not set on a manual transmission.
3-18
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL
are being used. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up
either.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it’s dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it’s bright enough
outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If you start your vehicle in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take
about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
lever is in the full bright position. See “Instrument Panel
Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-21.
If it’s dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a Headlamps Suggested message will appear
on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC) display.
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL
are still illuminated. Turning the exterior lamp control to
AUTO or to the low-beam headlamp position will
turn off the DRL and cancel the Headlamps Suggested
message. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still turn off and the
Headlamps Suggested message will be displayed.
You can turn it off by pressing the OK button if you have
the Navigation audio system or the CLR button if you
have the Base audio system.
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off. Then turn on the fog lamps or parking
lamps, and the DRL will turn off. The Headlamps
Suggested message will appear on the DIC display.
This will work regardless of gear position and whether or
not the parking brake is set.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-19
Light Sensor
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to OFF. This protects against draining
the battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver does
not work if the headlamps are turned on after the
ignition is turned to OFF.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on.
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of the instrument panel. If you
cover the sensor, it will read dark, and the exterior
lamps or the Headlamps Suggested message will
appear on the DIC whenever the ignition is on.
3-20
Interior Lamps
Entry Lighting
Instrument Panel Brightness
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated by
the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for
about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the
light sensor; it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if
the ignition key is placed in ON, or immediately
deactivate if the power locks are activated.
The lever for this feature is
located on the overhead
console.
Parade Dimming
Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the lights
or away from it to dim them.
If you slide the lever all the way toward the symbol past
the resistance point, the interior lamps will come on.
To turn them off, slide the lever back toward the
minimum brightness setting.
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the
key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This
feature operates with the light sensor and is fully
automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside
and the parking lamps are active, the instrument
panel displays can be adjusted by sliding the instrument
panel brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten
or away from the symbol to dim the lighting.
3-21
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system is
designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking
easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such as
parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect objects up
to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how
close these objects are from your rear bumper.
3-22
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using Rear Park Assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
above the liftgate glass.
It has three color-coded
lights that can be seen
through the rearview mirror
or by turning around.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is
less than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system turns on,
the three lights on the display will illuminate for
one and a half seconds to let you know that the system
is working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R)
at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will
flash to remind you that the system does not work at
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
English
5 ft.
40 in.
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
20 in.
0.5 m
1 ft
0.3 m
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object,
it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
3-23
When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air
brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph
(25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see
your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may
also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Cleaning the Outside of
Your Vehicle on page 5-95.
3-24
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console, one in the rear of the center console, one in
the rear compartment, and there may be an additional
outlet in the rear of the center console.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet will only operate when the
ignition is in ACCESSORY or ON and for 10 minutes
after turning the ignition to OFF. If you would like
the accessory power outlet to operate regardless of
ignition position, and for extended periods of time, you
can do the following:
1. Open the hood and locate the underhood fuse block.
2. Find the I/P OUTLET and OUTLET fuses and
move them over a space, to the open cavity
next to each fuse.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located under the climate control panel
on the center console. Press on the door to release the
ashtray.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the center console
by gripping the edges and pulling straight out. To
reinstall, push the tray back into place.
There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-25
Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray. The
vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the
rear seat passengers.
Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will pop
back out by itself once the element has heated for use.
Cigarette lighters can be used to provide power to
accessories. See Accessory Power Outlets on
page 3-24 for more information.
3-26
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, the
air conditioning compressor and the fan speed. AUTO
will appear on the display.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will remain in
manual mode at that temperature and it will not go
into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). If you have the Base
audio system, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-61. If you
have the Navigation system, see “Setup Menu” in the
Index of the Entertainment and Navigation System
Supplement.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
3-27
Manual Operation
yN z (Mode):
Pressing the MODE switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation
and places the system in manual mode. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-32 to change this airflow from the outboard
outlets.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Y (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-28
[ (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows), and a little air directed to
the windshield.
The MODE switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-35
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
h (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this
button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. The
air-conditioning compressor also comes on.
QPWRR (Power/Passenger’s Temperature): Press
the PWR button located on the passenger’s side of
the climate control panel to turn the passenger’s climate
control system on. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to increase or decrease the temperature for
the front passenger.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes when defog is
selected.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn off the air conditioning compressor. Press
AUTO to return to automatic operation or press the
A/C OFF button again.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the
air inside your vehicle to become too dry or stuffy. To
prevent this from happening, after the air in your vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
QPWRR (Power/Driver’s Temperature):
Press the
PWR button located on the driver’s side of the
climate control panel to turn the entire climate control
system on or off. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to increase or decrease the temperature
inside your vehicle.
3-29
Sensors
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,
near the windshield.
3-30
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the air
inside your vehicle, then use the information to maintain
the selected temperature by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and the
air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary.
Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate
control system will not work properly.
Defogging and Defrosting
0 (Defrost):
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
yN z (Mode):
Press this button until defog appears
on the display.
- (Defog):
This mode directs the air between the
windshield, floor outlets and side windows. When you
select this mode, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The
recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter defog
mode. If you select recirculation while in defog mode, it
will be cancelled after 10 minutes.
Pressing defrost directs most of the air
to the windshield, with some air directed to the side
windows. In this mode, the system will automatically turn
off recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
defog position. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-32
for more information. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
defog position. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-32
for more information.
3-31
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. Or, if the vehicle’s speed
is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger will stay
on continuously. If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger button is on.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
3-32
Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheels
to open or close the outlets.
Use the thumbwheel on
the front outboard outlets
to select from the
following positions.
j (Side Window Defog):
Turn the thumbwheel to this
symbol to use the side window defog setting. The air
coming through the outlets will be directed toward
the side windows to clear fog.
k (Open):
Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
open the outlets completely and allow the maximum
amount of air to enter your vehicle. A small amount of air
will still be directed to the side windows.
l (Closed):
Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering
the vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
•
•
•
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-35.
3-33
Rear Air Conditioning System
To operate the rear system using the front control, just
turn the knob to the fan position you want.
If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning system it
has two fan speed selectors. One fan speed selector is
located in the front overhead console and the other
is located in the headliner above the second row seats.
The rear air conditioning system is designed to
provide cooled air only. There is no heating provided
with this system.
To increase and decrease
the flow of cooled air to
the rear vents, turn
the knob to the fan speed
you want.
Front Control
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed. To turn the fan
off, turn the knob to the off position.
3-34
To use the rear control,
first turn the front control to
the AUX position. Then,
the rear control can
be used to increase and
decrease the airflow.
Rear Control
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs to be changed
periodically. For how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
1. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
See Hood Release on page 5-11 for more
information. Locate the passenger compartment air
filter access panel door.
2. Push the two tabs on the access panel door
towards the windshield.
3. While pressing forward, lift the access panel out of
the clipped position and pull towards the front of the
vehicle. This releases the clips and allows the
panel door to be removed.
4. Remove the old filter and insert a new one. Make
sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the
passenger compartment.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13 for the correct part number for the filter.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover.
3-35
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate
them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-36
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52 for
more information.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-37
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometers
The speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
You may wonder what happens if a vehicle has to have
a new odometer installed. The new one may read
the correct mileage. This is because your vehicle’s
computer has stored the mileage in memory.
Using the Base audio system, do the following:
While the tap up/tap down feature is active, the
odometer will change to show the gear range. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25
for more information.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). To access the trip odometer, use one of
the following procedures:
1. Press the INFO (Information) button located to the
right of the screen to access the DIC menu.
2. Scroll through the menu using the up or down
arrows on the INFO button until you reach Trip
Odometer A or Trip Odometer B.
The selected trip odometer (A or B) will be displayed
at the top of the screen with the accumulated
mileage.
3. Repeat the steps to view the other trip odometer.
3-38
You can reset the selected trip odometer by pressing
CLR (Clear) button located in the center of the
INFO button to the right of the screen. The mileage for
that trip odometer will return to zero. Each trip
odometer must be reset individually.
Using the Navigation audio system, do the following:
Tachometer
This gage indicates the
engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
1. Press and hold the vehicle information button in the
upper right corner of the screen for three seconds
to access the Vehicle Information menu.
2. Use the up and down arrows on the screen to bring
TRIP A or TRIP B into view. Then press the button
next to the trip you wish to be viewed.
The selected trip odometer (A or B) will be displayed
at the top of the screen with the accumulated
mileage.
3. Press the RETURN button to return to the previous
page.
4. Repeat the steps to view the other trip odometer.
You can reset the selected trip odometer by pressing
RESET button on the Vehicle Information menu.
The mileage for the selected trip odometer will return to
zero. Each trip odometer must be reset individually.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-39
Engine Speed Limiter
Air Bag Readiness Light
This feature prevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpm are too high, the throttle is closed to reduce
speed, if this is not sufficient, then the fuel supply to the
engine will be limited. When the rpms return to
normal, the fuel supply will return to normal. This helps
prevent damage to the engine.
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag
Systems on page 1-50.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
3-40
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
When you turn the key to
ON or START, this light
will come on briefly
to show that the generator
and battery charging
systems are working
properly.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. You
should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save
your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If there is a problem with the air bag system in your
vehicle, the Service Air Bag message will appear on the
DIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-65 for more information.
3-41
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-42
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the light
comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the antilock portion of the
brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you don’t have antilock brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.
3-43
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the TC (traction control)
warning light comes on
and stays on, there may be
a problem with the
traction control system.
The TC (traction control) warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC (traction control) on/off
button located near the shift lever.
If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on or comes
on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon as
possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system by
turning the ignition off then back on. If the light still stays
on or comes back on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. Have the traction control system
inspected as soon as possible. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
3-44
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light tells you that
your engine is very hot.
This light will come on when you first start the vehicle
as a check to let you know that the light is working. It will
go out after a few seconds. If the light does not come
on, the bulb may be burned out. See your dealer
for assistance in changing the bulb.
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on and
stays on while you are driving, your vehicle may
have a problem with the cooling system. You should
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible to avoid damage to the engine. A warning
chime will sound when this light is on, also.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into
the shaded area, the
engine is too hot.
Tire Pressure Light
This light will come on if
the system detects low tire
pressure.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
That reading means the same thing as the warning
light – the engine coolant is very hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-27.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-69 for
more information.
For more information on the proper tire pressure, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48. For more
information on your tires, see Tires on page 5-58.
3-45
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-46
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will cause
your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-47
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-48
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if something goes wrong.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
Sport Mode Light
This light will come on
while the Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature is
in use.
When you stop using the DSC feature, the light will go
out. If it stays on, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-25 for
more information.
Security Light
For information
regarding this light,
see Theft-Deterrent
System on page 2-17.
3-49
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
when the fog lamps
are in use.
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See “Fog Lamps” under Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-8 for more information.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See “Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-8 for more information.
Lights On Reminder
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
See “Headlamps On Reminder” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8 for more
information.
3-50
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
See “Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8 for more
information.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
ignition is in ON.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.
3-51
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s
systems. It is also used to display driver personalization
features and warning/status messages. All messages
will appear on the audio system display which is also the
display for the Navigation system.
System Controls
If you have the Base audio system, use the following to
operate the DIC:
INFO (Information): Use the up or down arrows on this
switch to scroll through the system status information.
CLR (Clear): Press this button to clear DIC messages
and to reset DIC items to zero. This button is also
used to exit out of a menu. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-65 and Status of Vehicle Systems
on page 3-53 for more information.
TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: Once a menu is displayed,
use the knob located to the lower right of the display to
scroll through the menu items and/or select them.
To scroll through the menu items, turn the knob. Once an
item is highlighted, press the knob once to select it.
Base Audio System
3-52
The Vehicle Information menu allows you to select the
vehicle information to be displayed and allows you
to reset or turn on or off certain information. You can
access the Vehicle Information menu by doing one
of the following:
• Press and hold the vehicle information button in the
upper right corner of the screen for three seconds,
or
e/ z (Audio/Adjust):
This is the Audio/Adjust
button.
Navigation/Audio System
If you have the Navigation system, use the following to
operate the DIC.
Briefly press the blue vehicle information button in the
upper right corner of the screen. Each press of this button
will scroll to the next available vehicle information item.
_(Vehicle Information):
This is the Vehicle
Information button.
• Press the Audio/Adjust button to the left of the
screen to bring up the Main Audio menu and
then press the Vehicle Information button on the
Main Audio menu.
Status of Vehicle Systems
You can view the status of several vehicle systems
using the DIC. Depending upon whether or not
your vehicle has the Navigation system, the menu items
will vary slightly.
3-53
Vehicle Information Menu
(Base Audio System)
To access this menu using the Base audio system,
press the up or down arrow on the INFO switch located
to the right of the display.
The following items are available when the ignition is in
RUN. These items will not be available when the
ignition is in accessory:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OUTSIDE TEMP
MI TRIP A*
MI TRIP B*
MILES RANGE
MPG AVG*
MPG INST
GAL FUEL USED*
AVG MPH*
3-54
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TIMER*
BATTERY VOLTS
ENGINE OIL LIFE*
TRANS FLUID LIFE*
TIRE PRESSURE*
PSI LF TIRE
PSI RF TIRE
PSI RR TIRE
PSI LR TIRE
BLANK LINE
*These items can be reset. Each one must be reset
individually. For a detailed description of the menu items
and how to reset them, see “Vehicle Information
Menu Item Descriptions” later in this section.
You can view any of these items at any time, but only
one item can be displayed at a time.
Vehicle Information Menu
(Navigation System)
To access the Vehicle Info menu using the Navigation
system, press and hold the vehicle information button in
the upper right corner of the screen for three seconds.
You can also access this menu through the Main Audio
menu. See “Main Audio Menu” in the Index of the SRX
Entertainment and Navigation System owner’s manual.
The following submenu appears when Vehicle Info is
selected:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clock/Outside Air Temp
Trip Odometer A*
Trip Odometer B*
Fuel Range
Average Fuel Economy*
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Fuel Used*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Average Vehicle Speed*
Timer*
Battery Voltage
Left Front Tire Pressure
Left Rear Tire Pressure
Right Front Tire Pressure
Right Rear Tire Pressure
Engine Oil Life*
Transmission Fluid Life*
*These items can be reset. Each one must be reset
individually. For a detailed description of the menu items
and how to reset them, see “Vehicle Information
Menu Item Descriptions” following.
You can view any of these submenu items at any time
by selecting them using the button next to the item.
The currently selected item is displayed at the top of the
screen. Only one item can be displayed at a time.
3-55
Vehicle Information Menu Item
Descriptions
The following paragraphs contain a more detailed
description of each menu item:
Clock/Outside Air Temp (Navigation System): If you
select this item, the clock and outside temperature will be
displayed at the top of the screen. The outside
temperature will be displayed in either degrees
Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius depending upon whether
the system is set for English or metric units. If you wish to
change the units, see “Main Audio Menu” in the SRX
Entertainment and Navigation System owner’s manual.
OUTSIDE TEMP (Base Audio System): If you select
this item, the current outside temperature is displayed at
the top of the screen. It will be in either degrees
Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius depending upon whether
the system is set for English or metric units. If you wish to
change the units, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-61.
MI TRIP A and B/Trip Odometer A and B: For
information on the trip odometers, see “Trip Odometers”
under Speedometer and Odometer on page 3-38.
3-56
MPG AVG/Average Fuel Economy: If you select this
item, the approximate average miles per gallon
(mpg) or Liters per 100 kilometers (L/100km) is
displayed. This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100km) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset.
To reset the MPG AVG using the Base audio system,
press the CLR button located to the right of the screen.
The display will return to zero.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy using the
Navigation system, press and hold the vehicle
information button in the upper right corner of the
screen for three seconds to bring up the Vehicle
Information menu. Use the up and down arrows on the
screen to select Average Fuel Economy and then
touch the RESET button. Touch the RETURN button on
the screen to go back to the previous page.
MPG INST/Instantaneous Fuel Economy: If you
select this item, the current fuel economy is displayed.
This number reflects only the fuel economy that the
vehicle has right now and will change frequently
as driving conditions change. Unlike average fuel
economy, this menu item cannot be reset.
GAL FUEL USED/Fuel Used: If you select this item,
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the last
reset of this menu item is displayed.
To reset GAL FUEL USED using the Base audio
system, press the CLR button located to the right of the
screen. The display will return to zero.
To reset the Fuel Used using the Navigation system,
press and hold the vehicle information button in
the upper right corner of the screen for three seconds to
bring up the Vehicle Information menu. Use the up
and down arrows on the screen to select Fuel Used and
then touch the RESET button. Touch the RETURN
button on the screen to go back to the previous page.
MILES RANGE/Fuel Range: If you select this item, the
approximate number of remaining miles or kilometers
you can drive without refueling is displayed. This
estimate is based on the current driving conditions and
will change if the driving conditions change. For
example, if you are driving in traffic making frequent
stops, the display may read one number, but if you enter
the freeway, the number may change even though
you still have the same amount of gas in the gas tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Low Fuel Level
message will be displayed. See “Low Fuel Level
Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-65 for more information.
AVG MPH/Average Vehicle Speed: If you select this
item, the average speed of the vehicle is displayed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This
average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this menu item.
To reset AVG MPH using the Base audio system, press
the CLR button located to the right of the screen. The
display will return to zero.
To reset the Average Vehicle Speed using the Navigation
system, press and hold the vehicle information button in
the upper right corner of the screen for three seconds to
bring up the Vehicle Information menu. Use the up and
down arrows on the screen to select Average Vehicle
Speed and then touch the RESET button. Touch the
RETURN button on the screen to go back to the
previous page.
3-57
TIMER/Timer: If you select this item, a timing feature is
displayed. The timer functions like a stopwatch in that
you can record the time it takes to travel from one point
to another.
To turn on the timer using the Base audio system, press
the CLR button located to the right of the screen
once. To turn off the Timer using the Base audio system,
press the CLR button again.
When the timer is off, the display will show the timer
value and TIMER OFF. The timing feature will stop.
To reset the timer using the Base audio system, turn off
the timer and then press and hold the CLR button.
The display will return to zero.
To turn on the Timer using the Navigation system, press
and hold the vehicle information button located in the
upper right corner of the screen for three seconds
to bring up the Vehicle Information menu. Use the up
and down arrows on the screen to select timer and then
press the ON button on the screen. Touch the
RETURN button on the screen to go back to the
previous page.
3-58
To reset the Timer using the Navigation system, press
and hold the vehicle information button in the upper
right corner of the screen for three seconds to bring up
the Vehicle Information menu. Use the up and down
arrows on the screen to select Timer and then touch the
RESET button. Touch the RETURN button on the
screen to go back to the previous page.
BATTERY VOLTS/Battery Voltage: If you select this
item, the current battery voltage is displayed. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the display will have OK
after it. For example, the display may read 13.2 Battery
Volts OK.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
there are four possible DIC messages that may be
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-65 for more information.
TIRE PRESSURE: If you select this item, the air
pressure of each road tire will be displayed.
LF TIRE/Left Front Tire Pressure: If you select this
item, the air pressure in the driver’s side front tire will be
displayed. If the tire pressure is normal, OK will be
displayed with this item. If the tire pressure is low, LOW
will be displayed with this item. The pressure will be
displayed in PSI or KPA. If you wish to change the units
on the base system, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-61.
If you wish to change the units on the Navigation
system, see “Main Audio Menu” in the SRX
Entertainment and Navigation System owner’s manual.
RR TIRE/Right Rear Tire Pressure: If you select this
item, the air pressure in the passenger’s side rear tire will
be displayed. If the tire pressure is normal, OK will be
displayed with this item. If the tire pressure is low, LOW
will be displayed with this item. The pressure will be
displayed in PSI or KPA. If you wish to change the units
on the base system, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-61. If
you wish to change the units on the Navigation system,
see “Main Audio Menu” in the SRX Entertainment and
Navigation System owner’s manual.
RF TIRE/Right Front Tire Pressure: If you select this
item, the air pressure in the passenger’s side front tire will
be displayed. If the tire pressure is normal, OK will be
displayed with this item. If the tire pressure is low, LOW
will be displayed with this item. The pressure will be
displayed in PSI or KPA. If you wish to change the units
on the base system, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-61. If
you wish to change the units on the Navigation system,
see “Main Audio Menu” in the SRX Entertainment and
Navigation System owner’s manual.
LR TIRE/Left Rear Tire Pressure: If you select this
item, the air pressure in the driver’s side rear tire will be
displayed. If the tire pressure is normal, OK will be
displayed with this item. If the tire pressure is low, LOW
will be displayed with this item. The pressure will be
displayed in PSI or KPA. If you wish to change the units
on the base system, see DIC Main Menu on page 3-61.
If you wish to change the units on the Navigation
system, see “Main Audio Menu” in the SRX
Entertainment and Navigation System owner’s manual.
3-59
ENGINE OIL LIFE/Engine Oil Life: If you select this
item, the percentage of remaining oil life is displayed.
If you see 99% Oil Life on the display, that means
that 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
message will appear on the display. You should change
the engine oil as soon as possible within 200 miles.
Be sure to keep a written record of the mileage and date
of the oil change so you will have it for future reference.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life monitor separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life monitor, see Engine
Oil on page 5-16.
The engine oil life monitor does not check the amount
of oil your vehicle has, so you should check the oil level
periodically. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more
information.
3-60
TRANS FLUID LIFE/Transmission Fluid Life: If you
select this item, the percentage of remaining
transmission fluid life is displayed. If you see 99% Trans
Fluid Life on the display, that means that 99% of the
current transmission fluid life remains.
When the transmission fluid life is depleted, the Change
Transmission Fluid message will appear on the
display. You should change the transmission fluid as
soon as possible within 200 miles. Be sure to keep
a written record of the mileage and date of the fluid
change so you will have it for future reference.
When you reset the Change Transmission Fluid
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the transmission fluid life monitor separately.
For more information on resetting the transmission fluid
life monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 5-24.
DIC Main Menu
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
(Base Audio System)
There are two different procedures for accessing the
DIC main menu depending upon whether or not
your vehicle has the Navigation system.
To access the main menu of the DIC, do one of the
following:
• Using the Base audio system, press the TUNE/SEL
knob once. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items.
• Refer to the SRX Entertainment and Navigation
System owner’s manual supplied with your
vehicle for more information on the accessing main
menu and descriptions of the menu items for the
Navigation system.
The DIC main menu for the Base audio system consists
of the following menu items:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
e BASS - MID - TREBLE
e EQ
DSP
DVD
AVC
H/A
AUTO STORE
CAT
TA
RDS MSG
AF
SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
9 (English/Metric Units)
TCS
8 (Clock)
8/ 4 (Clock/Information Display)
SETUP
3-61
DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions
(Base Audio System)
The following descriptions are for the Base audio
system. For information pertaining to the Navigation
audio system, see “ Audio System” in the Index of the
SRX Entertainment and Navigation System Supplement
supplied with your vehicle.
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE:
This menu
item allows you to adjust the levels for the bass,
midrange, treble, balance, and fader features of the
audio system. For more information, see Audio
System(s) on page 3-94.
e EQ (Equalizer):
This menu item allows you to
choose among five preset equalizations for the audio
system. See “Equalizer” under Audio System(s) on
page 3-94 for more information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): This menu item
allows you to select the DSP type that you want on the
audio system. You may choose Normal, Talk, Spacious,
Rear Seat or Driver Seat. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to
scroll through these choices. Once the desired choice is
displayed, turn the knob to set your DSP choice and
continue scrolling through the main menu.
See “DSP” under Audio System(s) on page 3-94 for more
information.
3-62
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc): This menu item allows
you to turn the DVD on and off. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob once to turn DVD on and off. When DVD is on,
an X will be in the box next to DVD on the menu.
The X disappears when DVD is off.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-112 for
more information.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): This menu
item allows you to turn the AVC feature on and off.
Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to turn AVC on and off.
When AVC is on, an X will be in the box next to AVC
on the menu. The X disappears when AVC is off.
See “AVC” under Audio System(s) on page 3-94 for
more information.
H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menu item
allows you to switch back and forth between your home
and away preset radio stations. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob to switch between home and away.
See “Home and Away Preset Stations” under Audio
System(s) on page 3-94 for more information.
AUTOSTORE: This menu item allows you to
automatically store radio stations with the strongest
signals as presets. See Audio System(s) on page 3-94
for more information.
CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to select
radio stations based on preset categories. To turn
the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
When CAT is on, an X will be in the box next to CAT on
the menu. The X disappears when CAT is off.
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item allows you
to turn the AF feature on and off. To turn on AF,
press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When AF is on,
an X will be in the box next to AF on the menu.
The X disappears when AF is off.
See Audio System(s) on page 3-94 for more information.
See “Using RDS” under Audio System(s) on page 3-94
for more information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item allows
you to turn the TA feature on and off. To turn the
TA feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When
TA is on, an X will be in the box next to TA on the
menu. The X disappears when TA is off.
See “RDS Messages” under Audio System(s) on
page 3-94 for more information.
RDS (Radio Data System) MSG (Message): This
menu item allows you to view an RDS radio station
message broadcast by a radio station. To view
the message, press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
The message will appear on the screen.
SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs the
audio system to seek only local radio stations with the
strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong
signal in a large area. Use LOCAL when you are in
urban areas where there are several strong radio station
signals and you want to limit the number of stations to
those with the strongest signals only. Use DISTANT
when you are in rural areas where there are fewer radio
station signals available.
To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Your choice will be set when you press
BACK and return to the main menu.
See “RDS Messages” under Audio System(s) on
page 3-94 for more information.
3-63
9 (English/Metric Units):
Use this menu item to
adjust the measurement units.
You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and
METRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is displayed,
turn the knob to set your choice and continue scrolling
through the main menu.
The measurement units that you choose will be reflected
on all the vehicle system displays, not just the DIC
information. For example, the climate control panel will
display degrees Celsius if you choose METRIC UNITS.
TCS (Traction Control System): You can enable or
disable the traction control system using this menu item.
Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on and off.
You can also turn the traction control system off using the
traction control button located near the shift lever.
When you disable the traction control system, the
Traction Suspended message will appear on the DIC
and the traction control system warning light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-65 and Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-44 for more
information.
3-64
8 (Clock):
Use this menu item to set the time on the
vehicle’s clock.
See Setting the Time on page 3-94 for more information.
8/ 4 (Clock/Information Display):
Use this menu
item to toggle between the clock display and the XM™
Information (Song, Artist, Title), if available.
See Audio System(s) on page 3-94 for more information.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the following
submenu is available:
• Personalization
• Language
• Configure Display Keys
To change the language displayed on the radio, select
LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob. Turn the
TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the available languages
and press the knob to make your selection. If you
accidentally select a language that you did not want,
ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.
For more information on the other items in the SETUP
menu, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-74.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem
sensed in one of your vehicle’s systems. The text
messages are the same for both the Base audio and
Navigation systems unless otherwise indicated.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, do one
of the following:
• Using the Base audio system, press CLR.
• Using the Navigation system, Press the Ok button
on the screen.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the screen
seriously and remember that clearing the message will
only make the message disappear, not the problem.
Battery Saver Active
This message appears when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this
message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying
to save the charge in the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until you find BATTERY VOLTS
(Base audio system) or by selecting Battery Volts from
the Vehicle Information menu (Navigation system).
See “Vehicle Information menu” in the SRX
Entertainment and Navigation System owner’s manual
for more information.
Battery Voltage High
This message indicates that the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above approximately
16 volts, this message will be displayed.
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and radio, set the
climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on the
highest setting, and turn the rear window defogger on.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until you
find BATTERY VOLTS (Base audio system) or by
selecting Battery Volts from the Vehicle Information
menu (Navigation system). See “Vehicle Information
menu” in the SRX Entertainment and Navigation System
owner’s manual for more information.
3-65
Battery Voltage Low
Check Tire Pressure
This message will appear when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has been
drained.
This message indicates that one or more of the vehicle’s
tires are low. See Status of Vehicle Systems on
page 3-53 for information on checking your vehicle’s tire
pressures.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving but
may take a few hours to do so. Consider using an
auxiliary charger (be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
instructions) to boost the battery after returning home or
to a final destination.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly, you
can reduce the load on the electrical system by
turning off the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until you find BATTERY VOLTS
(Base audio system) or by selecting Battery Volts from
the Vehicle Information menu (Navigation system).
See “Vehicle Information menu” in the SRX
Entertainment and Navigation System owner’s manual
for more information.
3-66
Check Oil Level
This message indicates that the oil level is low.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information on
checking you engine oil.
Change Engine Oil
This message indicates that the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed within 200 miles.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 and Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life monitor separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life monitor, see Engine
Oil on page 5-16.
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid
Check Gas Cap
This message indicates that the life of the transmission
fluid has expired and it should be changed within
200 miles. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11
for the proper fluid and change intervals.
When this message appears on the display, the gas cap
has not been fully tightened. You should recheck the
gas cap to ensure that it’s on and tightened properly.
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
transmission fluid life monitor separately. For more
information on resetting the transmission fluid life
monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 5-24.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid.
You should refill the tank as soon as possible.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-37 for more
information.
Check Brake Fluid
This message will display if the ignition is in ON to
inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have
the brake system serviced by a technician as soon
as possible. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-42 for more information.
Check Washer Fluid
Driver Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s door was not closed completely.
You should make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
Check Coolant Level
This message will appear when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced
by a technician as soon as possible. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.
3-67
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine
Engine Overheated – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
This message will appear when the engine has
overheated. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off
immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-27. A chime will also
sound when this message is displayed.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27 for more information.
Engine Coolant Hot – AC
(Air Conditioning) Off
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired as soon as possible to avoid compressor
damage.
3-68
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-27 for more information.
Engine Power Reduced
This message informs you that the vehicle is reducing
engine power because the transmission is being
placed in gear under conditions that may cause damage
to the vehicle’s engine or transmission. This also can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
Fuel Level Low
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on fuel. You should refill the tank
as soon as possible. A single chime will sound when
this message is displayed.
Headlamps Suggested
Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the amount of available
light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior lamp
control is off. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even
though the DRL are still illuminated and it has become
dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or
other exterior lamps.
A multiple chime will sound when this message is
displayed.
This message will also appear when the windshield
wipers have been on for more than six seconds and the
exterior lamp control is off or in the parking lamp
position.
Ice Possible
This message appears when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions.
Left Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Lift Gate Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the liftgate was not closed completely. You
should make sure that the liftgate is closed completely.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
Passenger Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side front door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door
is closed completely.
Personalization Off/Driver Identification
(Navigation System)
When this message appears, the personalization
features previously stored are turned off. If you want
your customized settings to be automatically recalled
when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
or when you remove the key from the ignition, you must
enable them in the DIC. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-74 for more information.
This message is also used to identify the
driver (1, 2 or 3) on the Navigation system.
3-69
Right Rear Door Ajar
Service Charging System
When this message appears on the display, the right
rear door it means that the passenger’s side rear
door was not closed completely. You should check to
make sure that the door is closed completely.
This message will display when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced at your dealership.
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System
This message appears when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced if you notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
Service Air Bag
There is a problem with the air bag system when this
message appears. Have your vehicle serviced by
a qualified technician at your dealership immediately.
See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-40 for more
information.
3-70
Service Electrical System
This message will display if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or
the ignition switch. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealership.
Service Fuel System
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected a
problem within the fuel system when this message
appears. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealership.
Service Idle Control
A problem with the idle control has occurred when this
message displays. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealership.
Service Stability System Message
Stability System Off Message
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called Stabilitrak®.
The Stability System Off message will be displayed any
time you turn off Stabilitrak® using the TC (traction
control) on/off button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-9 for more information. When this message
has been displayed, Stabilitrak® is no longer available to
assist you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10. The Service
Stability System message will be displayed if there has
been a problem detected with Stabilitrak®.
If the Service Stability System message comes on while
you are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible and
stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off then back on. If the Service Stability System
message still stays on or comes back on again while you
are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
Stabilitrak® System inspected as soon as possible.
Stability System Engaged Message
The Stability System Engaged message will be
displayed any time Stabilitrak® is actively assisting you
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
may stay on for a few seconds after Stabilitrak® stops
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
Stability System Ready Message
The Stability System Ready message will be displayed
any time you turn back on Stabilitrak® using the TC
(traction control) on/off button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. When
this message has been displayed, Stabilitrak® is ready to
assist you with directional control of the vehicle if needed.
Service Steering System
Your vehicle may be equipped with a speed variable
assist steering system. See Steering on page 4-12.
The Service Steering System message will be displayed
if a problem is detected with the speed variable assist
steering system. When this message is displayed, you
may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels “heavier,” but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle.
3-71
Service Suspension System
Service Vehicle Soon
This message is displayed to indicate that the
suspension system is not operating properly.
Have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.
This message is displayed when a non-emissions
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced at your dealership as soon as possible.
Service Theft System
Starting Disabled – Remove Key
This message means there is a problem with the
Immobilizer. See Immobilizer on page 2-18 for more
information. A fault has been detected in the system
which means that the system is disabled and is
not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts,
however, you may want to take your vehicle to your
dealer before turning off the engine.
This message will appear when the vehicle
theft-deterrent system detects that an improper ignition
key is being used to try to start the vehicle. Check
the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it may need
to be replaced. If it is not damaged, remove the key
and try to start the vehicle again. If it still does not start,
try another ignition key or have your vehicle serviced
at your dealership.
Service Tire Monitor System
This message will appear if the Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM) system is not working properly. Have your vehicle
serviced at the dealership as soon as possible.
Service Transmission
There is a problem with the transmission of your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.
3-72
Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem
This message appears when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced at your dealership.
Theft Attempted
This message is displayed if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle.
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off
Traction Suspended
This message will appear when the Engine Control
Module (ECM) detects that the maximum speed for your
vehicle has been reached. Your vehicle’s top speed is
based on the top speed rating of the tires. This ensures
that your vehicle stays in a safe operating range for
the tires.
This message will appear when the traction control
system has been temporarily shut off because
your vehicle’s brakes have overheated. This message
does not indicate a problem with your vehicle’s
traction control system. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
Traction Engaged
Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine
This message will appear when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will
stay on for a few seconds after the traction control
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
This message indicates that the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.
Turn Signal On
If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message will appear
as a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiple
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
3-73
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Entering the Personalization Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with personalization that allows
you to program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. The number of programmable
features varies depending upon which model of
the vehicle is purchased.
To enter the feature programming mode, use one of the
following procedures:
On all vehicles, features such as climate control
settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock,
remote lock and unlock confirmation, and automatic
door locks have already been programmed for
your convenience.
Some vehicles are equipped with additional features
that can be programmed including the seat and outside
rearview mirror position. The navigation system
screen preferences will remain at the last set position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the ability to program
additional personalization features, the driver’s
preferences are recalled by pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter, 1 or 2, or
by pressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2,
located on the driver’s door. Certain features can
be programmed not to recall until the key is placed in
the ignition. To change feature preferences you
must use one of the following procedures.
3-74
Base Audio System
1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the engine.
Make the vehicle is in PARK (P).
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display will show
either Driver 1 or 2 depending on which button
was selected.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the main
menu of the DIC.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP is highlighted.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
SETUP menu.
6. Scroll to the feature you want to change, and press
the TUNE/SEL knob to turn the feature on or off. If
the feature is turned on, a check mark will appear
next to the feature name.
If none of the personalization items are turned on,
turn on the personalization menu by pressing
the TUNE/SEL knob. The list of features will then
appear, and you can repeat Step 6.
Navigation System
1. Turn the ignition to ON without the engine running.
Make the vehicle is in PARK (P).
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display will show
either Driver 1 or 2 depending on which button
was selected.
3. Press the Audio/Adjust button to the left of the
screen to enter the Main Audio menu.
4. Touch the Feature Programming button on the
screen.
5. Scroll to the item you want to change and press the
button next to the item to modify the item as
desired. If the item is turned on the color of the ON
button will be light blue. If the item is turned off
the color of the OFF button will be light blue.
If none of the personalization items are on, turn on
the personalization menu by pressing the ON
button next to personalization.
Personalization Features
The following choices are available for programming
using both the Base audio and Navigation systems
unless otherwise indicated.
Personalization Name
This feature allows you to type in a name that will appear
on the DIC display whenever the corresponding remote
keyless entry transmitter is used or one of the buttons on
the driver’s door armrest (1 or 2) is pressed.
If a customized name is not programmed, the system
will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond with
the numbers on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitters.
To program a name, use one of the following procedures:
To customize the name using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu item
by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
3-75
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach the first
letter you want; the letter will be highlighted. There
is a complete alphabet with both upper and
lower case letters and the numbers zero through
nine. Also included are spaces and other non-letter
characters such as the ampersand (&).
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display.
If you make a mistake, press the TUNE/SEL knob
repeatedly to cycle through all the characters
until you reach the character you wish to change.
5. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the name you want is
complete. You can program up to 16 characters.
To customize the name using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu item
and press the EDIT button next to it.
3-76
3. A keyboard will appear on the screen. Use it to
enter the desired name, up to 20 characters.
4. When you done entering the name press the
ENTER button on the bottom of the screen.
The name you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Configure Display Keys
(Base Audio System)
This feature allows you to customize the functions of the
four soft keys located to the left and right of the audio
display. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys”
under Radio with CD on page 3-95 for programming
information.
Remote Recall Memory/Recall Driving
Positions
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat, adjustable
pedals and mirror controls when the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to REMOTE RECALL MEMORY and press
the ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the
item is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If REMOTE RECALL MEMORY is turned on, this
will also turn off REMOTE EXIT RECALL and
KEY IN RECALL MEMORY if they are not already
turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Scroll to REMOTE RECALL MEMORY to highlight it.
3-77
Remote Exit Recall
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to REMOTE EXIT RECALL to highlight it.
3-78
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to REMOTE EXIT RECALL and press the ON
or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item is
turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If REMOTE EXIT RECALL is turned on, this will
also turn off REMOTE RECALL MEMORY if it is not
already turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Key in Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat and mirror
positions when the key is inserted into the ignition.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to KEY IN RECALL MEMORY to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to KEY IN RECALL MEMORY and press the
ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item
is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If KEY IN RECALL MEMORY is turned on, this will
also turn off REMOTE RECALL MEMORY if it is
not already turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-79
Auto Exit Seat
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the key is removed from the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to AUTO EXIT SEAT using the TUNE/SEL
knob to highlight it.
3-80
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to AUTO EXIT SEAT and press the ON or
OFF button next to it as desired. If the item is
turned on the color of the ON button will be light
blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Twilight Delay
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds
Mode 2: 0:15 seconds
Mode 3: 0:30 seconds
Mode 4: 1:00 minute
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 2:30 minutes
Mode 8: 3:00 minutes
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since the
vehicle left the factory. To determine the mode to which
the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a
different mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to TWILIGHT DELAY using the TUNE/SEL
knob to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
available delay settings. When the delay time
you want is highlighted, press the TUNE/SEL knob
once to select it.
When the mode is turned on, an X will appear in
the box to the left.
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
To change the mode using the Navigation system, do
the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to TWILIGHT DELAY and press the ADJUST
button next to it.
3. A new screen will appear with the available delay
settings. Use the buttons on the screen to adjust
the selected delay.
4. When you are done entering the delay press the
RETURN button on the screen.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-81
Lights Flash at Unlock
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. The lamps will remain on for approximately
20 seconds unless a door is opened, the ignition
is turned to ACCESSORY, ON or START or the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK to highlight it.
3-82
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK and press
the ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the
item is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Lights Flash at Lock
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature
to work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking
lamps or headlamps are on.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK and press the
ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item
is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both the lights
flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
3-83
Horn Sounds at Lock
This feature sounds the horn once when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All
doors must be closed for this feature to work.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
Mode 2: OFF
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
2. Scroll to HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK and press the
ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item
is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK to highlight it.
3-84
If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash At Lock
will also be on. You can choose Lights Flash At Lock
by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lock will always have
Lights Flash At Lock enabled when it is selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Exterior Lights at Unlock
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON or START or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK and press the
ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item
is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to EXT. LIGHT AT UNLOCK to highlight it.
3-85
Driver Unlock in Park
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-86
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK and press the
ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item
is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK is turned on, this will
also turn off DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OUT,
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK and DOORS UNLOCK
KEY OUT if they are not already turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Driver Unlock Key Out
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OUT and press
the ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the
item is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OUT is turned on, this
will also turn off DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK,
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK and DOORS UNLOCK
KEY OUT if they are not already turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Scroll to DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OUT.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-87
Doors Unlock in Park
The feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-88
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK and press the
ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item
is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK is turned on, this will
also turn off DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK, DRIVER
UNLOCK KEY OUT and DOORS UNLOCK
KEY OUT if they are not already turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Doors Unlock Key Out
This feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DOORS UNLOCK KEY OUT and press
the ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the
item is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
If DOORS UNLOCK KEY OUT is turned on, this will
also turn off DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK, DRIVER
UNLOCK KEY OUT and DOORS UNLOCK IN
PARK if they are not already turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Scroll to DOORS UNLOCK KEY OUT.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-89
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
up to five seconds after a power door lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed. The five second delay occurs after the
last door is closed.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DELAYED LOCKING using the TUNE/SEL
knob to highlight it.
3-90
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to DELAYED LOCKING and press the ON or
OFF button next to it as desired. If the item is
turned on the color of the ON button will be light
blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Lock Passenger Window
This feature allows you to disable either all the passenger
window switches or the rear passenger window switches
only. If this feature is turned on, all passenger window
switches will be disabled when the window lockout button
is pressed. If the feature is off, only the rear passenger
window switches will be disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2-14 for more information.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LOCK PASS WINDOW and press the ON
or OFF button next to it as desired. If the item is
turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to LOCK PASS WINDOW using the
TUNE/SEL knob to highlight it.
3-91
Mirror to Curb in Reverse
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, the
passenger’s outside rearview mirror will move
downward so you can view the curb when the shift lever
is shifted into REVERSE (R). The mirror will return to
the last known driving position when the shift lever
is moved out of REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View
Assist Mirror on page 2-38 for more information.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to MIRROR TO CURB IN REV using the
TUNE/SEL knob to highlight it.
3-92
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to MIRROR TO CURB IN REVERSE and
press the ON or OFF button next to it as desired.
If the item is turned on the color of the ON
button will be light blue. If the item is turned off the
color of the OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Enhanced Chime Volume
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL
Mode 2: LOUD
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To program the vehicle to a different
mode, use one of the following procedures:
To change the mode using the Base audio system,
do the following:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to ENHANCED CHIME VOLUME using the
TUNE/SEL knob to highlight it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between the normal and loud settings.
To change the mode using the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Enter the Personalization menu by following the
instructions listed previously.
2. Scroll to ENHANCE CHIME VOLUME and press
the ON or OFF button next to it as desired. If the
item is turned on the color of the ON button will be
light blue. If the item is turned off the color of the
OFF button will be light blue.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Exiting the Personalization Menu
Once you’ve finished making your selections on the
Base audio system, you will return to the main audio
screen.
To exit Feature Programming using the Navigation
system, press any of the button located next to
the screen.
3-93
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it
properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-21.
3-94
Setting the Time
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the
display.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under
Radio with CD on page 3-95 for more information on
configuring the keys.
Radio with CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
Single CD Player Audio System Shown – Six-CD
CD Player Similar
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
3-95
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): Available
only with the premium Bose® audio system, AVC
monitors the noise in the vehicle and will adjust the
volume level so that it always sounds the same to you.
AVC works best when listening at low volume levels.
At loud listening levels there will be little or no effect.
To turn AVC on and off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO VOLUME
COMP. appears on the display.
Playing the Radio
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on or off.
An X will appear in the box when AVC is selected on.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-96
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source, either
radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded the display will
not change from the radio source.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or
XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, if equipped).
Q SEEK R:
Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
SEEK will appear on the display. The sound will mute
while seeking.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Q SCAN R:
Press the SCAN button to enter
scan mode. SCAN will appear on the display. Press the
up arrow to scan to the next station. The radio will go
to a station, play for 5 seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press this button again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN
appears on the display. The radio will go to the
first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for
5 seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets.
LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature you can
set the radio to search for local stations or stations that
are further away for a larger selection. To set this feature
to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL or
SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select either LOCAL
or DISTANT.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
To search for stations, press the SEEK up or down
arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK will appear
in the display and seek to stations with strong signals
only. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK will
appear in the display and seek to stations with weak and
strong signals.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-97
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (48
contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing the
following steps:
To set your preset stations manually, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for two seconds until you hear a beep. The set preset
station number will appear on the display above the
pushbutton that it is set to. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton for less than two seconds, the
station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To set your preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, see each of
these features later in this section. When a
preset station is selected, once one of these
additional settings is selected, the preset station will
remember each setting and it will remain active,
until the setting is selected off for that preset station.
3-98
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set your preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. AUTOSTORE
will appear on the display. The radio will
automatically search the band and select and store
the six radio stations with the strongest signal.
The stations will be stored by signal strength, not
sequential order. The set preset station number will
appear on the display above the pushbutton that
it is set to. Whenever you press that numbered
pushbutton for less than two seconds, the station
that is set will return.
6. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because
they remain in the radios memory.
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you the
ability to store two different kinds of station presets.
HOME can be used for stations available where you live
and AWAY can be for stations available outside of
your local broadcasting area. To set preset stations for
home and away perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select your choice.
HOME or AWAY will appear on the display.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed
for setting your preset pushbuttons for both home
and away.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into the tone
settings.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
settings.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or to decrease
the bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or
noisy you may want to decrease the treble.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set your adjustment.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZER
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set your equalization
setting. The equalization setting will appear on the
display.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
3-99
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Using DSP
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the following
steps:
Available only with the premium Bose® audio system, this
feature is used to provide a choice of five different
listening experiences: DSP normal, talk, spacious, rear
seat and driver seat. DSP can be used while listening to
the radio or the CD player. The radio keeps separate
DSP settings for each band, preset, and source. To
select a DSP choice, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into the tone
settings.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll to BALANCE or
FADER.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the five
settings appears on the display.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the BALANCE
to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to
the front or the rear speakers.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSP setting.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set your adjustment.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
EQ0 (Normal): EQ0 will not be displayed when in
this mode.
3-100
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to time out.
DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall
audio performance for all passengers. DSP NORMAL
will not be displayed when in this mode.
TALK: This setting should be used when listening to
non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts, and books on tape. Talk makes
spoken words sound very clear.
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the listening
space seem larger.
REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give the
rear seat passenger(s) the best possible sound
quality. Sound quality for the front seat passengers may
be different when this setting is used.
DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give
the driver the best possible sound quality. Sound quality
for the front and rear seat passenger(s) may be
different when this setting is used.
RDS Messages
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station or a related network station, ALERT
will appear on the display. You will hear the
announcement, even if the volume is muted or a CD is
playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during the
announcement. You will not be able to turn off
alert announcements. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for the announcement, it will return to the
original station when the announcement is finished.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. If the whole
message does not appear on the display, parts of
the message will appear every three seconds until the
message is completed. Once the completed message
has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display
until another new message is received.
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), press
this button while in XM mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, PTY or Category, or
Channel Number/Channel Name.
3-101
If you would like to display the message, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until RECALL RDS
MESSAGE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message will
appear on the display.
Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, when TA is turned on it will seek to a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop and TA will
be displayed. When a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,
No Traffic will appear on the display.
Your radio will play traffic announcements if the volume is
low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the display
when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that
has traffic announcement broadcast capability.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on the
display, the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements and when a traffic announcement
comes on the tuned station you will hear it.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when TA is selected on.
3-102
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display keep pressing the CLR button
or wait for the display to time out.
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows
the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type.
PTY allows you to search for stations with specific types
of music. The selectable PTYs are POP, EASY,
TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
To activate program types, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PROGRAM TYPE
MODE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when PTY is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Once program type is activated the PTYs will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset
stations (if programmed). Press the pushbutton for the
PTY that you would like to listen to. Not all stations
support PTYs and pressing the pushbutton may not take
you to all of the stations with that music type.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the box
when AF is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
Radio Message
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has been activated. You
must return to the dealer for service.
3-103
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
Your system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-104
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. Your system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receiver
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-105
Using the Single CD Player
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
the CD will begin playing. CD will appear on the display.
A CD may be loaded with the radio off but it will not
start playing until the radio is on.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed).
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
3-106
F1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The display will show the elapsed
time of the track.
F2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within
a track. Release the pushbutton to play the passage.
The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play. RANDOM will disappear
from the display.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. REPEAT will appear on the display. Press
RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT will
disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display the
time of the track. Press this pushbutton again to
remove the time of the track from the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Q SCAN:
Press this button to listen to each track for
10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed).
LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
Using the Six-CD CD Changer
2. Press and release the LOAD button. Please Wait
will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
3-107
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display,
the number of the CD and the track number will
appear on the display if the radio is on.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the display will read
Please Wait.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Do not load a CD until INSERT appears on the
display. The CD player will take up to six CDs. Do
not try to load more than six. If you want to load
less than six CDs, load the desired amount. The CD
player will time out when it does not receive any
more CDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to play
automatically.
F1 CDn(Down): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous CD.
F2 CDm(Up): Press this pushbutton to go to the
next CD.
CD REV { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within the track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The display will show the elapsed
time of the track.
CD FWD | (Forward): Press this pushbutton to go to
the next track. Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within the track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The display will show the elapsed
time of the track.
F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD (Repeat
CD), RDM TRK (Random Track), and RDM ALL
(Random All CDs).
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of the
CD(s). NORMAL will not be displayed when in
this mode.
3-108
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat
play. RPT TRCK will disappear from the display.
• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over again.
RPT DISC will appear on the display. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT
DISC will disappear from the display.
• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM TRK will appear on the display.
Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off
random play. RDM TRK will disappear from
the display.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded and tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM ALL will appear on the display. Press
the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM ALL will disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display the
time of the track. Press this pushbutton again to
display CD PLAY and press this pushbutton once more
to clear the display.
Q SEEK R:
Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Q SCAN:
Press this button to listen to each track for
10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject the CD that is
currently playing, or press and hold this button to eject
all of the CDs loaded. you will hear a beep. Eject
may be activated with the ignition or radio off.
3-109
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
This feature allows you to customize the four keys that
are located on each side of the radio display to
make it easier to adjust the radio features and other
non-radio related features are also available for
customization.
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• If you are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
To program the configurable radio display keys, perform
the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP appears
on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into SETUP.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which of the
four configurable keys you would like to change.
The currently assigned feature will be shown.
3-110
7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select the configurable
key to change.
Navigation/Radio System
8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the feature that
you would like to store to the key.
9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you have found
the feature to be stored. The display will update,
by showing the symbol of the feature that you
selected next to the configurable key.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature will
not appear on the display when programming the
remaining configurable keys. The configurable keys can
be changed at any time.
Navigation/Radio Display and Controls
The display screen is located in the center of the
instrument panel.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a radio navigation
system that includes Digital Signal Processing (DSP),
Radio Data System (RDS) with Program Type (PTY)
selections that will seek out the kind of music you want to
listen to. The radio system can also communicate with
your navigation system to broadcast announcements on
traffic, weather, and emergency alert communications.
For information on how to use this system, see the
“Navigation System” manual.
3-111
Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Player
Your vehicle may have the optional Digital Versatile
Disc (DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system includes a DVD player, a video display
screen, two sets of wireless headphones, and a
remote control.
The DVD player is located in the floor console under the
display. Flip up the display to access the DVD player.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
RSE is available in a base and an uplevel version. The
uplevel version is provided with the Navigation radio
(if equipped). The uplevel RSE system offers the
rear seat passengers to have shared control of FM1,
FM2, AM, weather, CDC, and XM (48 contiguous
US states, if equipped).
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate DVD region code for the
country that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region
code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers. The driver
cannot safely view the video screen while driving and
should not try to do so.
The DVD player will also play audio CDs. Not all home
recorded CDs (CD-R or CD-RW formats) will play in
this DVD player.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-112
If your vehicle is equipped with the Navigation system,
each press of the SRCE button will cycle the rear
video between DVD, AUX, TV, and front DVD.
Pressing the enter button when this menu appears on
the display will toggle the RSE setting between all
speaker and rear video. Shared audio will not be
available if the front passenger has turned on the
parental control.
All speaker means that the radio and the RSE unit will
share control of what is heard through the vehicle
speakers. All audio and video sources are available for
selection with the SRCE button when in all speaker.
DVD Player Buttons
Rear Video means that the RSE unit will only control what
is seen on the rear display and what is heard through the
headphones.
O(Power):
o (Stop):
Press this button to turn the RSE system
on or off.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to cycle through
the available video modes. Auxiliary is available when
something is plugged into the available auxiliary jacks on
the DVD faceplate.
Press this button to stop the play of the
DVD player. Press this button twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to toggle
between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
3-113
y (Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD menu.
This button only operates with a DVD.
If your vehicle is equipped with the TV option, the menu
button will bring up a TV specific menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to modify the
video screen display characteristics.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation):
Use the arrow
keys to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press this button to select items within
a menu.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Navigation system,
after pressing the SRCE button, the enter button
can select all speaker or rear video. See the SRCE
button previously for more information.
Audio/Video Jack: These jacks allow you to connect
audio and video signals from an auxiliary device such as
a camcorder or a video game unit to your RSE just as
you would to a standard television. The left jack is for left
audio, the middle jack is for right audio and the right
jack is used for video. The system requires standard
RCA cables (not included) to connect your auxiliary
device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage.
3-114
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs on the RSE,
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder to the jacks and turn on both the auxiliary
device power and the power on the front of the
RSE player. To have use of these jacks, you must
select AUX using the SRCE button on the DVD player
faceplate or the remote control.
X (Headphone Jack):
These jacks allow you to listen
to the RSE through wired headphones (not included).
O (Headphone Volume):
Turn the left knob to
increase the volume of the headphone hooked into the
left headphone jack. Turn the right knob to increase
the volume of the headphone hooked into the right
headphone jack.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY, or
when RAP is active.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the face of the DVD player or on the
remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip
the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing
after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not
begin to play the main title, refer to the on-screen
instructions, as the DVD may be displaying its main
title menu.
Stopping and Resume Playback
To stop a disc, press and release the stop button on the
DVD player or the remote control. To resume playback,
press the play/pause button on the DVD player or
the remote control. As long as the disc has not been
ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice,
the movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped. If the disc has been ejected, or if the stop
button has been pressed twice, the disc will resume play
at the beginning.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc within 25 to 30
seconds. The disc will then be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of this disc
automatically.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
• Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
able to be read or if the disc format is not
compatible with the DVD player. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the DVD player.
• Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if
the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
• Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if
the DVD player can not play the disc. Severely
damaged discs will cause this error. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the DVD player.
• Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the DVD player. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the DVD player.
• No Disc: This message will be displayed if the
PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player.
3-115
Parental Control Button: This button is located on the
navigation system screen. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the
audio. The video screen will display Parental Control
ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will
flash. It will also disable all other button operations
from the remote control and the DVD player, with the
exception of the eject button. The driver will then be able
to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers.
Press this button again to restore normal operation of
the DVD player.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in either the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones and the infrared receiver
for the remote control. If the screen is in the closed
position, the infrared signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones and the remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
in an enabled power mode.
Remote Control
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the floor console. Lift up
the screen by the top or the sides into the full open
position, Adjust the screen’s position as desired. When
the video screen is not in use, close the screen.
3-116
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as
damage may occur. See Cleaning the Video Screen
on page 3-127 for more information.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window above the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the entertainment system to receive signals from
the remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Remote Control Buttons
z (Display):
Press this button to toggle through the
video screen display features: color, contrast,
brightness, tint and display mode. The display mode
consists of: normal, full, and zoom. Normal means the
horizontal image not stretched and the borders at
the left and right of the picture are blank. Full means the
horizontal image is stretched across the display and
all of the vertical lines are displayed. No borders
are present. Wide means the horizontal image is
stretched up and down the display and the image tends
to be stretched at the borders instead of at the middle.
Borders are not displayed. Press the left or right
navigation keys to select the display mode.
q (Return):
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on or off.
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on for 8 seconds.
v (Title):
Press this button to access the multiple
titles (if available) of a DVD.
y (Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is being played
and a menu is active.
n (Up):
Press this button to move up the menu list of
a DVD.
q (Down):
Press this button to move down the menu
list of a DVD.
p (Left):
Press this button to move to the left of the
menu list of a DVD.
main menu.
3-117
o (Right):
Press this button to move to the right of the
menu list of a DVD.
r (Enter):
Press this button to select items within a
menu.
e (Audio):
Press this button to open a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The
format and content of this function is defined by the disc
and is dependent on the disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to open a menu that
will operate only when a DVD is being played. The
format and content of this function is defined by the disc
and is dependent on the disc.
| (Angle):
Press this button to open a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function is defined by the disc and is
dependent on the disc.
l (Next):
Press this button to go to the next chapter
or track of a DVD or CD.
g (Previous): Press this button to go to the previous
chapter or track of a DVD or CD.
3-118
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
through the chapter or track of a DVD or CD. This button
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
or the previews.
r (Rewind): Press this button to rewind through the
chapter or track of a DVD or CD. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright or the
previews.
c (Stop):
Press this button to stop the play of a DVD
or CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to toggle
between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The remote control
numeric keypad provides you with the capability of direct
chapter, title and track number selection.
Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
numeric key pad, within 3 seconds of inputting a numeric
selection to clear all numeric inputs.
Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
numeric key pad, to select chapter, title, and track
numbers greater than 9.
Battery Replacement
Headphones
To change the batteries, do the following:
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Close the battery door securely.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
control and it would not be covered by your vehicles
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. An
indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. To turn the
headphones OFF activate the ON/OFF control.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The headphones will automatically turn off if they lose
the signal from the system after about four minutes
in order to preserve their battery power. The signal may
be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the signal transmitters that are
located below the video display screen.
3-119
Battery Replacement
Stereo RCA Jacks
To change the batteries, do the following:
The RCA jacks are located on the front of the DVD
player faceplate. These jacks allow you to connect audio
and video signals from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to your RSE just as you
would to a standard television. The L jack is for left
audio, the R jack is for right audio and the V jack is used
for video. The system requires standard RCA cables
(not included) to connect your auxiliary device to
the RCA jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for proper usage.
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Tighten the screws to close the compartment door.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-120
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs on the RSE,
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder to the jacks and turn on both the auxiliary
device power and the power on the front of the
RSE player. To have use of these jacks, you must
select AUX using the MODE button on the DVD player
faceplate or the remote control.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the navigation down arrow key to scroll down
to Video Format.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the navigation key to select the PAL video
format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wired Headphones (not provided)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio you may adjust
the speaker volume on the radio. If the RSE system
power is not on, the RSE system will not be an available
source on the radio. Refer to the radio information for the
radio that your vehicle has for more information.
3-121
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
3-122
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into the
DVD player.
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
Change the Video
Format to PAL or NTSC.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the
audio or on the screen is
wrong.
Press the MENU button
on the DVD player or on
the remote control and
change the audio or
language selection on the
DVD menu.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the MODE button
to toggle between the
DVD player and the
auxiliary source.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
Press the DISP button on
the DVD player or on the
remote control. Change
the display mode.
Problem
The remote control does
not work.
Recommended Action
Point the remote control
directly at the infrared
window below the video
screen while using.
Check that the batteries
are not dead or put in
wrong.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
After stopping the player,
I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off and
sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Press the MODE button
to change from the DVD
player mode to the
auxiliary source mode.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
Problem
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Recommended Action
Press the eject/load
button on the DVD player.
Turn the power off, then
on again, then press the
eject/load button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
DVD player.
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
This could be caused by
interference from cellular
telephone towers or by
using your cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
What is the best way to
clean the video screen?
Wipe the video screen
with a soft cloth that is
damp with water.
3-123
Theft-Deterrent Feature
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. Your vehicle has a “built in” theft-deterrent feature
on each radio that is automatic – there is no
programming required. The radio in your vehicle cannot
be used in any other vehicle. When the radio was
originally installed in your vehicle at the factory, it stored
the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each time
the ignition is turned on, the VIN is verified. If the
vehicle’s VIN does not match the VIN stored in the
radio, THEFTLOCK® will be activated and the audio
system will not play. If the radio is removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace
the radio back to your vehicle.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
> (Mute):
Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to hear the sound.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to choose FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states,
if equipped), radio, or CD.
3-124
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has
the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc CD audio
system, you can press this button to interact with the
OnStar® system. See the OnStar® manual provided with
your vehicle for more information.
+ u — (Volume): Press this button to increase or to
decrease volume.
If your vehicle has the optional navigation system,
you can press this button to initiate voice recognition.
See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation System
manual for more information. You may also be able to
interact with the OnStar® system using this button.
See the OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for
more information.
If a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go to the
start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds have
played. Press the plus sign to go to the next track.
If you press either the minus or the plus button more
than once, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD.
1–6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play a
station you have programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
If you have the Radio with CD, each press of this button
will take you to the next track.
If you have the Radio with Six-Disc CD, each press of
this button will take you to the next CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to the
next or the previous radio station.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus buttons, until
you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or fast reverse
through the CD. Press either button again to play the
passage.
If you have the Navigation System, some of the audio
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing
in the navigation radio. See the Navigation System
manual for more information.
3-125
DVD Distortion
You may experience audio distortion in the
IR headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems (GPS)*,
two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States)
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives you digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to come and go. Your radio
may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cellular Phone Usage
Understanding Radio Reception
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference is
described as an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If you notice static while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-126
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Cleaning Your DVD Player
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
When cleaning the outside DVD cabinet face and
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean
water.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-127
Diversity Antenna System
Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear quarter
glass windows, located in the rear of the vehicle on the
driver and passenger sides. Be sure that the inside
surface of the rear windows are not scratched and that
the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pickup
stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3-128
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true,
the grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone
to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid
lines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular
telephone antenna over the grid lines.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System (48 Contiguous US States)
Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM™ system may be affected
if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your XM™ system. Make
sure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Magnetic Ride Control ...................................4-10
Stabilitrak® System .......................................4-10
Panic Brake Assist ........................................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-16
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads .......................................4-17
Driving at Night ............................................4-31
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-33
City Driving ..................................................4-36
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-37
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-38
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-39
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-39
Winter Driving ..............................................4-41
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-45
Towing ..........................................................4-47
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-47
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-47
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-48
Level Control ...............................................4-53
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-54
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
Drunken Driving
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Stabilitrak® System
on page 4-10.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less with one driver and as
long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age,
physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But
even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph
(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space
between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-43.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that one or both of the
rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
On an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle the system
will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
This warning light will
come on to let you know if
there’s a problem with
your traction control
system.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-44. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when the TCS is off. You could damage your
vehicle’s driveline.
When the TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles, you
may still feel the system working. This is normal
and necessary with the AWD hardware on your vehicle.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” under If You
Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-45 for
more information. See also Winter Driving on page 4-41
for information on using TCS when driving in snowy
or icy conditions.
4-9
To turn the system off,
press the TC (traction
control) button located
near the shift lever.
If you press the TC button once, the traction control
system will turn off and the traction control system
warning light will come on. Press the TC button again to
turn the system back on. If you press and hold the
TC button for five seconds, the Stabilitrak® system and
the traction control system will turn off. Press the
TC button again to turn Stabilitrak® back on. For more
information, see Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.
Magnetic Ride Control
Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automatic
ride control is achieved through a computer used to
control and monitor the suspension system. The
controller receives input from various sensors to
determine the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem within the system, the DIC will
display a Service Suspension System message.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for
more information. See your dealer for service.
Stabilitrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called Stabilitrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists you
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
Stabilitrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. Stabilitrak®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the
direction which you are steering.
4-10
When the system activates, a Stability System Engaged
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with Stabilitrak®, a
Service Stability System message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-65. When this message is
displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
Stabilitrak® comes on automatically whenever you start
your vehicle. To help assist you with directional
control of the vehicle, you should always leave the
system on. You can turn Stabilitrak® off if you ever need
to through the TC (traction control) on/off button. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver to
maintain brake application. When this happens the brake
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let the system work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this
is normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal has been released.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Stabilitrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-8 for more information.
4-11
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-12
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Stabilitrak® System
on page 4-10.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the message center.
See “Stability System Active Message” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-14
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
4-15
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Control System, remember: It
helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have
this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle Off Paved Roads
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have all-wheel
drive. If your vehicle does not have all-wheel drive, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,
solid surface.
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions — features like all-wheel drive — help make it
much better suited for off-road use. Its higher ground
clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off-road
obstacles. But your vehicle does not have features like
special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear
range, things that are usually thought necessary for
extended or severe off-road service.
Also, see Braking on page 4-6.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes are not marked.
Curves are not banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In
short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is why
it is very important that you read this guide. You will find
many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make
your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be?
What are the local laws that apply to off-roading
where you will be driving? If you do not know, you
should check with law enforcement people in the area.
Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be
sure to get the necessary permission.
4-17
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
CAUTION:
4-18
(Continued)
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48, Luggage
Carrier on page 2-46 and Tires on page 5-58.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
• Always carry a liter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire form the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off- road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-19
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
Surface Conditions:: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles:: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-20
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can not control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can
be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if
you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and understanding of what your vehicle can and can not
do. There are some hills that simply can not be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can not control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
4-21
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
4-22
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
4-23
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can not make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do?
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-24
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
your vehicle, it is steep enough to cause you to roll
over if you turn around. If you can not make it up the
hill you must back straight down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can not do it. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle
would take if it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
4-25
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.” Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-26
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut,
etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-27
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-28
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You can not accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-29
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to
start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take
you longer to stop.
4-30
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-33 for
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-31
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-32
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-33
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-34
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps – not just your
•
•
parking lamps – to help make you more visible to
others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-58.
4-35
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-37.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-36
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
4-37
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-38
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-39
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
•
•
•
4-40
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to very
careful.
4-41
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more. See
Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10 and “Rocking Your
Vehicle” under If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow on page 4-45.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
4-42
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-43
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-44
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-77.
4-45
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
Using the Recovery Hook
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has the
Stabilitrak® System, turn the system off by pressing and
holding the Traction button so that the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED message and the traction off light are
illuminated on the instrument panel cluster. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a
few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hook if your vehicle has one. If you do need
to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a recovery hook.
The recovery hook is provided in the jack storage area.
The hook can be installed either at the front of the
vehicle on the passenger side or at the rear of
the vehicle on the driver side. At either location, remove
the access cap from the vehicle trim and screw the
hook into position. You may need to use the hook if you
are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some
place where you can continue driving.
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-46
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Service on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a
“dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-38.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Dolly Towing” following for more information.
4-47
Dolly Towing
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towed
using a dolly. If you have an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)
vehicle, it can only be towed on a flat-bed trailer. To tow
your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4-48
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-58
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows the
tire size and recommended inflation pressures
needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicles
without a center pillar will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s door edge. This
label lists the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight is
called the vehicle capacity weight.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-49
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-54 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
4-50
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs (68
kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
B
C
Total
Item
Description
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs (68
kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs (91
kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-51
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire label on
your truck or consult your dealer for additional details.
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge. The label shows the size of your original tires
and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and
trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
4-52
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
{CAUTION:
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual.
Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It’s automatic — you don’t need to
adjust anything.
4-53
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
4-54
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (454 kg) or
3,500 lbs. (1588 kg) if your vehicle has the trailer
towing package. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa,
Ontario L1H 8P7
4-55
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-48 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10–15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
4-56
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-48. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32. Dirt and
water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all. If you
two more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg), use trailer brakes.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
4-57
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-58
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-59
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive
belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you
find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review this information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
4-60
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-24
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-48
Rear Axle .......................................................5-49
Front Axle ......................................................5-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-51
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-51
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-51
Headlamps, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ......5-51
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ...................5-53
Sidemarker Lamps ........................................5-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Sidemarker Lamps .....................................5-54
Back-Up and License Plate Lamps ..................5-55
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-56
Tires ..............................................................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-68
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-69
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-72
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-72
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Buying New Tires .........................................5-73
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-75
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-75
Tire Chains ..................................................5-77
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-78
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-91
Appearance Care ............................................5-92
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-92
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-94
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-94
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-95
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-97
5-2
Finish Damage .............................................5-97
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-97
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-97
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-98
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-99
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-99
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-99
Electrical System ..........................................5-100
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-100
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-100
Power Windows and Other
Power Options ........................................5-100
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-100
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-109
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than this manual can. To order the proper service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-12.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-60.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
•
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-99.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
91 or higher for best performance. You may also use
middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your
engine.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is
behind a hinged door on
the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push press on the rear edge of
the fuel door and it will pop open.
5-7
While refueling, hang the
fuel cap by the tether
from the hook on the
fuel door.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill your
tank, and wait a few seconds after you’ve finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-95.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-46.
The Check Gas Cap message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap is not
reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-65 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-46.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the lever inside the vehicle to open the hood.
It is located on the lower left side of the instrument
panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the front edge of the grille near the
center. Move the release lever to the side and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6, you’ll see the following:
5-12
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-100.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-37.
C. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes
on page 5-38.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27
and Cooling System on page 5-30.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8, you’ll see the following:
5-14
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-100.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-35.
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-37.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes
on page 5-38.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27
and Cooling System on page 5-30.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
5-15
Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light
and/or the Oil Pressure
Low — Stop Engine
message on the DIC
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
For more information, see “Oil Pressure Low — Stop
Engine” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-65 and Oil Pressure Light on page 3-48.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
5-16
3.6L V6 Engine
4.6L V8 Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick for the 3.6L V6 engine or below
the indentation at the tip of the dipstick for the 4.6L V8
engine, then you will need to add at least one quart
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-109.
3.6L V6 Engine
4.6L V8 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
5-18
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30
if it is going to be 0°F (–18°C) or above.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils
such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a Mobil
1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: when adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M may
not be available. You can add substitute oil designated
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.
If temperatures are above 0°F (–18°C), you may
substitute SAE 10W-30 with the starburst symbol.
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
5-19
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A Change Engine Oil message in the DIC
will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
5-20
GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Change Engine Oil
Message and the Oil Life Indicator
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
Change Engine Oil Message in the DIC being turned on,
reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the Change Engine
Oil message and the oil life indicator must be reset.
To reset the message and indicator, use one of
the following procedures:
Base Audio System
Press the CLR button located to the right of the DIC
display to acknowledge the Change Engine Oil
message. This will clear the message from the display
and reset it.
To reset the oil life indicator, use the following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the oil life
indicator will be reset.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the Change Engine Oil message comes back on
when you start your vehicle or the percentage does not
return to 100, the engine oil life system has not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
Navigation System
Press the display button to acknowledge the Change
Engine Oil message. This will clear the message
from the display and reset it.
To reset the oil life indicator using the Navigation
system, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine running.
2. Turn the system on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob
located to the lower left of the DIC display screen.
3. Press and hold the vehicle information display
button located in the upper right of the screen
for 3 seconds to enter the vehicle information menu.
4. Use the scroll up or down display keys to select
Engine Oil Life.
5. Press and hold the RESET button on the display.
The percentage will return to 100, and the oil life
indicator will be reset. Repeat the steps if the
percentage does not return to 100.
6. Press the RETURN button on the display to return
to the main page.
7. Turn the key to OFF.
If the Change Engine Oil message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-21
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-22
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near the front.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change and
replace it at the first oil change after 25,000 miles
(40 000 km)
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the sides of
the cover.
2. Lift the cover off.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
3. Pull out the old engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Install a new engine air cleaner/filter, if needed.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13 for the correct part number for the filter.
5. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer or service center when you have your oil
changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
5-24
How to Reset the Change Transmission
Fluid Message and the Transmission
Fluid Indicator
After the transmission fluid has been changed, the
Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission fluid
life indicator must be reset. To reset the message
and indicator, use one of the following procedures:
Base Audio System
Press the CLR button located to the right of the DIC
display to acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS FLUID
message. This will clear the message from the display
and reset it.
To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use the
following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the
transmission fluid life indicator will be reset.
3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does not return
to 100.
Navigation System
Engine Coolant
To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use the
following steps:
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
1. Turn the vehicle on with the ignition in RUN.
2. Turn the Navigation system on by pressing the
PWR/VOL knob.
3. Press and hold the vehicle information button in the
upper right corner of the screen for three seconds.
This will bring up the Vehicle Information menu.
4. Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the
items until you get to Transmission Fluid Life.
5. Press and hold the RESET button on the screen
until the Transmission Fluid Life is reset to 100
percent.
Repeat this procedure if the Transmission Fluid Life
does not reset.
6. Press the RETURN button on the screen to return
to the main screen.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34 F (−37° C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265° F (129° C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-25
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-26
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the
side to the horizontal mark.
If the Check Coolant Level message in the DIC comes
on and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for more
information.
Adding Coolant
®
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the surge tank pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage
may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
There are three engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for
more information.
5-27
Overheated Engine Protection
Operation Mode
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
This emergnecy operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
Should an overheated engine condition exist, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups
of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and
engine performance. A low coolant and/or engine
overheat indicator will communicate that an overheat
condition exists. Towing a trailer in the overheat
proteciton mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of the coolant loss and change the
oil. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
CAUTION:
5-28
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a Check Coolant Level
message, can indicate a serious problem. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no Check
Coolant Level message, but see or hear no steam,
the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the temperature control to the highest heat
setting and open the windows, as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-29
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
3.6L HFV6 shown
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-30
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If it isn’t, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed.
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
5-32
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for
the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or
the wrong mixture, your engine could get too
hot but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. You can
remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn and
then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-33
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-34
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for
the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the Check
Coolant Level message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center, coolant is at the proper fill
level. If a Check Coolant Level message does appear,
repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall the pressure cap or
see your dealer.
5-35
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the
center of the engine compartment, toward the front.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-36
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full.
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
The Check Washer Fluid message will appear on the
DIC when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-65 for more information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle near the front of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-37
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is,
you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
5-38
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-11.
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-92.
5-39
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-40
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your
braking system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts.
If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse.
The braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Battery
{CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-42
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-124.
5-41
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-42
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location of
the battery.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-43
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Don’t connect positive (+) to the negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect
the negative (−) cable to negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could also be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the ECM,
ECM mounting bracket or any cables that attach
to the ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM.
Attach the negative cable to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part, other than the ECM, ECM bracket
or cables attached to the ECM bracket.
5-44
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative terminal of
the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5-45
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
5-46
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-47
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.
5-48
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-49
Front Axle
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11 Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants.
How to Check Lubricant
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-50
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-55.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Your vehicle may be equipped with HID headlamps.
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Headlamps, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps
If your vehicle has halogen headlamps, you can replace
the bulbs using the following procedure. Use this
procedure to replace the front sidemarker and parking
lamp bulbs also.
If you only need to change the sidemarker bulb, there is
an alternate procedure. See Sidemarker Lamps on
page 5-54.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-51
To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and
access the bulbs, follow these steps:
To replace the headlamp high and/or low beam bulb(s),
do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
1. Remove the three Torx® screws on the back of the
access cap.
2. Use a tool to remove all of the fasteners along the
top surface of the front fascia.
2. You can now access the low and high beam bulbs.
Turn the low beam (upper) bulb socket one-eighth
turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
assembly. Turn the high beam (lower) bulb socket
one-eighth turn clockwise to remove it from the
assembly.
3. Use a tool to remove the one screw and one
retainer on top of the headlamp assembly.
4. Gently pull the front fascia away from the headlamp
assembly and remove the screw attached to the
bracket located at the lower inboard side of
the headlamp assembly.
3. Replace the bulb. See Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-55 for the proper bulb number.
4. Reinstall the three Torx® screws while making sure
the access cap seal gasket is located in the access
cap seal channel.
5. Pull the headlamp assembly straight out to
disengage the snap in the retainer at the lower
outboard back surface of the assembly and then
turn the lamp so that the inboard corner clears the
front fascia and pull the lamp out
5. Replace the lower outboard plastic snap-in retainer
in the fender bracket, if needed.
6. Remove the electrical harness connector from the
back side of the headlamp assembly access cap.
6. Reconnect the electrical harness at the back side of
the headlamp assembly.
7. Push the headlamp assembly straight into the
vehicle engaging the headlamp pin into the
snap-in retainer and adjusting the lamp inboard side
to clear past the front fascia.
5-52
8. Reinstall the two fasteners on top of the headlamp
assembly.
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps
9. Reinstall the screw at the lower inboard side of the
headlamp assembly through the hole in the bracket
into the headlamp.
To replace the front turn signal and/or fog lamp bulb(s),
do the following:
10. Reinstall the fasteners along the top surface of the
front fascia.
To replace the sidemarker and/or parking lamp bulb(s),
do the following:
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the assembly.
2. Replace the bulb. See Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-55 for the proper bulb number.
3. To reinstall the headlamp assembly, reverse Steps
5 through 10 of the procedure listed previously.
1. Remove the protection shield located on the
underside of the front of the vehicle by pulling out the
push-pins located on the underside of the shield. If
you are replacing a bulb on the passenger’s side,
also use a tool to remove the fasteners that attach
the front fascia extension panel in the wheelhouse.
2. Remove the two screws located on the inboard side
and bottom of the lamp assembly that attach the
lamp assembly to the front fascia.
3. Remove the lamp assembly from the front fascia by
rotating the lamp assembly rearward to disengage
the outboard hooks of the lamp from the slots
in the front fascia.
4. Disconnect the electrical harness connector from
the back side of the lamp assembly.
5. Remove the six Torx® screws located on the
access cap.
5-53
6. If you are replacing the fog lamp bulb, disconnect
the electrical connector from the back of the bulb
socket.
3. Rotate the front sidemarker socket one-eighth turn
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Replace the bulb. See Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-55 for the proper bulb number.
7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove it from the assembly.
5. Reinstall the socket to the headlamp assembly.
8. Replace the bulb. See Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-55 for the proper bulb number.
6. Replace the fasteners that attach the front fascia
extension panel in the wheelhouse.
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 7 to reinstall the bulb
socket and access cap.
Sidemarker Lamps
This procedure is for replacing the sidemarker bulb only.
If you need to replace the parking lamp bulb or
halogen headlamp as well, see Headlamps, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps on page 5-51.
1. Use a tool to remove the fasteners that attach the
front fascia extension panel in the wheelhouse.
2. Reach forward past the wheelhouse to the front
sidemarker socket in the outboard side of the
headlamp assembly.
5-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
It is recommended that this component be replaced as
a unit. See your dealer.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Sidemarker Lamps
It is recommended that this component be replaced as
a unit. See your dealer.
Back-Up and License Plate Lamps
7. Replace the bulb. See Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-55 for the proper bulb number.
To replace the back-up and/or license plate lamps,
use the following procedure:
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the license
plate applique assembly.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the liftgate trim panel on the interior of the
liftgate by pulling the trim panel snap-in fasteners
out of the retainers and also by using a tool to
remove the screw on the bottom right side of the
trim panel.
Replacement Bulbs
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
Exterior Lamp
3. Disconnect the courtesy lamp electrical connector
on the trim panel.
Back-Up Lamp
4. Use a tool to remove the five nuts on the back of
the license plate applique assembly.
Front Sidemarker
5. Remove the license plate applique assembly from
the liftgate by pulling the assembly rearward to
disengage the two snap-in retainer clips at the back
of the license plate applique assembly near the
liftgate panel.
Front Turn Signal Lamp/DRL
6. For the back-up lamp, turn the bulb socket
one-quarter turn counterclockwise to remove.
For the license lamp, slide the license lamp
assembly out of the license plate applique
assembly, and turn the bulb socket one-quarter
turn counterclockwise to remove.
Fog Lamp
Bulb Number
3157KX
9145
W5WLL
GM Part No.
10319395
Headlamp High-Beam
9005XS LL
Headlamp Low-Beam
9006XS LL
Parking Lamp
With Halogen Low Beam
With HID Low Beam
W5WLL
W5W B50X2
5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See Owner Checks
and Services on page 6-8.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off
again when the wipers are in the out-wipe position.
The driver’s side blade will be straight up and
down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
5-56
4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a
T-shaped position. You should be able to see a tab.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch
the windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade
assembly down far enough to release it from the
J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
5-57
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-58
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads. If you choose
to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size as your
original equipment tires.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-73.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical P-Metric,
LT-Metric and compact spare tire sidewall.
P-Metric Tire
5-59
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although one one side may have the date
of manufacture.
5-60
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information,
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-74.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
(D) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
LT-Metric Tire
5-61
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single.
Compact Spare Tire
5-62
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-91 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-77.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(G) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-91 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
5-63
Tire Size
The following illustrations show the different parts of a
tire size code.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C”
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Belt Rating Code: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter “R”
means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter
“B” means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-64
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size example
above shows dual or single tire configurations.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C”
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Belt Rating Code: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter “R”
means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter
“B” means belted-bias ply construction.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “LT” as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the
U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size example
above shows dual or single tire configurations.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-65
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
5-66
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants
a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-48.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
5-67
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-72.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards,
a tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-74.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-48.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-48.
5-68
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label or Tire and Loading
Information label shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-48.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
•
•
•
•
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Check your tires once a month or more.
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system on your
vehicle, uses radio and sensor technology to check tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted on each tire and
wheel assembly transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
Also, check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.
It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the recommended pressure
on the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM
system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the Driver Information Center (DIC);
and at the same time illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol, on the instrument panel cluster. For
additional information and details about the DIC operation
and displays see System Controls on page 3-52 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
5-69
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the
vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
The Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information Label (your vehicle’s tire information placard)
shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the
recommended cold inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
For the location of the tire and loading information label,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-72 and Tires on page 5-58.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
5-70
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPM sensors,
the identification codes will need to be matched to
the new tire/wheel position. Each tire/wheel position is
matched, to a sensor, by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. The sensors are matched, to the
tire/wheel positions, in the following order: left front
(LF), right front (RF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR).
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire/wheel positions the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the RKE transmitter. A single horn chirp
will sound, indicating that the TPM system is ready,
and the sensor matching process can begin.
5. Start with the left (driver’s side) front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 5 seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched to this
tire position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointy end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed
on the DIC screen. This message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the TPM
sensor. The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is
also displayed when the TPM system is malfunctioning.
One or more missing or inoperable TPM sensors will
cause the service tire monitor message to be displayed.
See your dealer for service.
7. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) front tire,
and repeat the procedure in step 6.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
8. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in step 6.
9. Proceed to the left (driver’s side) rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming double horn chirp,
for the left rear tire, exit the matching process
by turning the ignition switch to OFF.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-71
Tire Inspection and Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire
and wheel should be used only in the position it is in.
Check your tires and wheels regularly for unusual wear
and damage. Also see, Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-72
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-75.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
5-72
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-48, for examples of the labels and where they
can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
ride, tire pressure monitoring system, and other
things during normal service on your vehicle. If your
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number
will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes (other than those originally installed on
your vehicle) may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size
and type tires on all wheels. It is alright to
drive with your compact spare temporarily,
it was developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-91.
Whenever you replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning.
Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec numbered tires.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-73
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-74
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-75
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-76
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class ″S″ type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly
as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-77
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-78
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is located in the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Turn the nut holding the jack (and storage tray,
if applicable) counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the jack and wheel wrench.
1. If your vehicle has the cargo management system,
remove the storage bin to access the jack.
If your vehicle has the third row seat, remove the
head rest storage tray to access the jack.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and
the wheel wrench (B).
A. Wing Nut
B. Jack
C. Wheel Wrench
5-79
Removing the Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-91 for more information about the compact
spare.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Cable
C. Retainer
D. Compact Spare Tire
1. Open the storage compartment door of the cargo
management system that is nearest the liftgate
and remove the removable tub.
2. Attach the wheel wrench into the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
4. To remove the spare tire from the cable, tilt the
retainer and slip it through the wheel opening.
5. After removing the spare tire, turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the cable back up until you
feel two slips or hear two clicks.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the
vehicle. See “Storing a Flat Tire and Tools” later
in this section.
To continue changing the flat tire see “Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” later in this
section.
5-80
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may
be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the
following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is
visible.
2. If it’s not visible, see “Secondary Latch System”
following.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten
the cable.
3. Then loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable
all the way and then loosen it at least two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 4 under “Removing the Spare Tire” earlier
in this section.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground,
see “Secondary Latch System” following.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It’s designed to stop the compact spare tire from
suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the
spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to
work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem
pointing down. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools”
later in this section for instructions on storing the
spare tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
5-81
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at
Step 3.
2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise the
jack at least 10 turns.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place, this
lets you know that the secondary latch has
released.
5-82
7. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench.
9. Reach under the vehicle and remove the wheel
wrench and jack.
10. When the spare tire has been completely lowered,
tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening.
11. If the cable is hanging, turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out
from under the vehicle.
5-83
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry off the
center cap at the notch. Be careful; the edges may
be sharp. Don’t try to remove the cover with
your bare hands.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts – but do not remove
them – using the wheel wrench. (Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench
off the lug nut for each turn.)
3. Find the jacking
location using the
hoisting notches
located in the plastic
molding. The notches
in the plastic molding
are marked with a
triangle shape to help
you find them.
5-84
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
lift head until the jack just fits under the vehicle.
Notice: Using a jack to raise the vehicle without
positioning it correctly could damage your vehicle.
When raising your vehicle on a jack, be sure to
position it correctly under the frame and avoid
contact with the plastic molding.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
9. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the triangle on the
plastic molding as shown.
5-85
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
11. Install the spare tire and put the wheel nuts back on
with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-86
12. Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheel wrench to
the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
14. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in
the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat
tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to
an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 Y).
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
5-87
Storing the Flat Tire with Third Row
Passengers
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
1. Use the power third row seat button near the liftgate
to tilt the third row seatback forward slightly.
2. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in an upright position against the third row seat.
3. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
4. Tighten the tie-down strap.
5-88
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load Floor
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
1. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the
tire in a horizontal position on the floor in the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown
in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo
tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.
3. Tighten the tie-down strap.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
(Continued)
If this happened when your vehicle was
being driven, the tire might contact a person
or another vehicle, causing injury and,
of course, damage to itself as well. Be sure
the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored
with its valve stem pointing down.
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare
tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing
the rear of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to
be stored with the valve stem pointing down.
If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem
pointing upwards, its secondary latch won’t
work properly and the spare tire could
loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle.
CAUTION:
2. Lower the cable to the ground. See “Removing the
Spare Tire” earlier in this section.
3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the
center hole of the spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
(Continued)
5-89
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire.
6. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn
the tire so that the valve stem is towards the rear
of the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
7. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until
you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to rotate or turn the tire (B). If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
5-90
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course,
it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-91
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Carbon Tetrachloride
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
Gasoline
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-92
You and get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-98.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
5-93
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Care of Safety Belts
Use on a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or
sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface
finish.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Cleaning Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Cleaning the Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just water
and mild soap.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-98.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
5-94
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-98.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-98.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-95
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-96
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-97
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-98
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and
Swirl Remover Polish
other light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step,
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label in the trunk. It’s very helpful if you
ever need to order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the
vehicle.
5-99
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-60.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
5-100
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse blows, see your dealer
for service immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the
same amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, one located
in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side
and the other two under the rear seat.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located on
each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
Relays
LO SPEED
FAN RELAY
MINI
HI SPEED FAN
RELAY MINI
ACCESSORY
RELAY MINI
S/P FAN
RELAY MINI
PARK LAMP
RELAY MICRO
Usage
Low Speed Fan Motor
High Speed Fan Motor
Accessory Power Outlets
Series/Parallel Fan
Parking Lamps
5-101
Relays
HORN RELAY
MICRO
HI BEAM
RELAY MICRO
DRL RELAY
MICRO-OPT
LO BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
HDLP WASH
RELAY
MINI-OPT
CIGAR RELAY
MINI
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
FOG LAMP
RELAY MICRO
MAIN RELAY
MICRO
STARTER
RELAY MINI
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO
IGN-1 RELAY
MICRO
5-102
Usage
Horn
High-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Wiring
Harnesses
Usage
BODY W/H
Wiring Harness Connection
I/P W/H
Wiring Harness Connection
ENG W/H
FORWARD
LAMP
Engine Wiring Harness Connection
Forward Lamp Wiring Harness
Connection
Low-Beam HID Headlamps (Option)
J Cases
Headlamp Washer Motor (Option)
Cigarette Lighter
Front Blower
R REAR
R REAR
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
L REAR
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
L REAR
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
HI FAN
High Cooling Fan Motor
Fog Lamps
Powertrain/ECM
Starter Solenoid
Compressor Clutch
Ignition Switch (ON)
Usage
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
LOW FAN
Low Cooling Fan Motor
BLOWER
PWM Fan Motor Assembly
STARTER
Starter Solenoid
EBCM
Electronic Brake Control Module
Fuses
RT PARK
HORN
LT HI BEAM
Usage
Passenger’s Side Taillamp
Assembly, Front Sidemarker and
Front Parking Lamp Assembly
Dual Horn Assembly
Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
Fuses
FLASHER
V8 ECM
STRG CTLS
RT HI BEAM
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
HFV6 ECM
High Feature V6 ECM
(Electronic Control Module)
REAR WPR
Rear Wiper Motor
THEFT
LT PARK
LIC/DIMMING
DIM/ALDL
ECM, TCM (Transmission Control
Module), PASS-Key® III+ Module
Driver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,
Front Sidemarker and Front Parking
Lamp Assembly
Rear License Plate Assembly,
DIM (Dash Integration Module)
DIM, ALDL
(Assembly Line Data Link)
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module
V8 ECM, Canister Purge
Steering Wheel Control Pad,
Headlamp Switch
STARTER RLY Jumper to Starter Relay
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Side Low-Beam
RT LOW BEAM Passenger’s
Headlamp
Usage
WASH NOZ
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Heated Washer Nozzles
ODD COILS
Odd Ignition Coils, Fuel Injectors,
Odd Injection Coils
TCM/IPC
SPARE
TCM, ECM and IPC
(Instrument Panel Cluster)
Not Used
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
VICS
Vehicle Information and
Communication System
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
IGN SW
Ignition Switch
(Power to IGN-3 and CRANK)
VOLT CHECK
DIM
5-103
Fuses
ECM/TCM
WPR MOD
POSTO2
Usage
ECM, TCM, IPC,
PASS-Key® III+ Module
Windshield Wiper Module Assembly
Post O2 Sensors
COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch
WPR SW
FOG LAMP
OUTLET
EVEN COILS
I/P OUTLET
5-104
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Fuses
Usage
CCP
Climate Control
CAM
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Oxygen Sensors, CAM Phaser
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
Fog Lamps
Center Console Accessory
Power Outlet
Even Injection Coils
Instrument Panel Accessory
Power Outlet
Circuit
Breakers
HDLP WASH
C/B-OPT
Usage
Headlamp Washer Motor (Optional)
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver’s Side)
Relays
BASS RELAY
MINI
The driver’s side rear fuse block is located under the
rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The carpet
must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block.
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located at
each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
SPARE
ELC RELAY
MINI
SPARE
Usage
Brake Apply Sensor
Not Used
ELC (Electronic Level Control)
Compressor Motor
Not Used
L POSITION
RELAY MICRO Driver’s Side Position Lamp
R POSITION
RELAY MICRO Passenger’s Side Position Lamp
IGN 3 RELAY
MICRO
STANDING
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
Control for Position Lamp Relays
5-105
Relays
SPARE
Usage
Not Used
Driver’s Heated Seat Module
MEM/ADAPT
SEAT
Driver’s Power Seat Switch,
Memory Seat Module
REVERSE
LAMP
SPARE
POSITION
LAMP
SPARE
ELC COMP
FFSM
Flip Fold Seat Module
DRIVER
DR MOD
Driver’s Door Module
Usage
L FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
THEFT
Universal Garage Door Opener,
Intrusion Sensor, Diversity Antenna
Module
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
License Plate Lamp Assembly
Not Used
Taillamp Assemblies, Front Position
Lamp Assemblies
Not Used
ELC Compressor, ELC Solenoid
BASS
HDLP
LEVELING
SPARE
Taillamps, Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp, Flasher Module,
ABS Module, Trailer Lamps
Headlamp Leveling System Chassis
Sensors (Export Only)
Not Used
CCP
CCP (Climate Control Panel)
IGN 3
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
J Cases
Usage
AMP
Audio Amplifier
ELC
ELC Compressor
AUDIO
Radio, OnStar Module
Circuit
Breakers
FFS SW
Flip Fold Seat Switch
SEAT C/B
5-106
Usage
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
REV LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly
Fuses
Fuses
Usage
Power Seat Switches, Memory
Seat Module
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger’s Side)
Relays
The passenger’s side rear fuse block is located under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The carpet must be lifted up to access the rear
fuse block.
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located at
each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
Usage
PRIMARY
QUARTER A/C Rear A/C
RELAY MINI
SPARE
Not Used
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
RELAY MINI
SPARE
Not Used
AFTERBOIL
RELAY MICRO Afterboil Pump
INT LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
IGN 1 RELAY
MICRO
SPARE
Ignition Switch
Not Used
5-107
Relays
Usage
REAR FOG
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
FUEL PUMP
MOTOR
RLY MICRO
Fuel Pump Motor
Fuses
Usage
CANISTER
VENT
Canister Vent Solenoid
FUEL
PUMP MTR
Fuel Pump Motor
REAR HVAC
Rear Climate Control System
R FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
Module
Fuses
Usage
REAR HATCH
INTERIOR
LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
SIR
SDM (Sensing Diagnostic Module)
IGN 1
Shifter, Power Sounder, Rear
Parking Aid, Rearview Mirror, RIM
RT FRT
DR MOD
RIM
Passenger’s Door Module
RIM (Rear Integration Module),
Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder
REAR FOG
LAMP
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
SUSPNTN
Suspension Module
VICS
SPARE
TV Tuner Assembly, VICS (Vehicle
Information Communication System)
Module
Not Used
POWER
SOUNDER
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor
AFTERBOIL
Afterboil Heater Pump
5-108
Rear Hatch Latch
SPARE
Not Used
SPARE
Not Used
J Cases
Usage
SUNROOF
Power Sunroof Module
MOD
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element
Circuit
Breakers
DR MOD
PWR C/B
Usage
Door Modules
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English
Metric
1.26 lbs.
0.57 kg
Front and Rear A/C
1.76 lbs.
0.80 kg
Automatic Transmission
9.0 quarts
8.5 L
3.6L HFV6
9.7 quarts
9.2 L
4.6L V8
10.4 quarts
9.8 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Use Refrigerant Oil, R134a Systems
Front A/C
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L HFV6
4.6L V8
Fuel Tank
Wheel Nut Torque
5.6 quarts
5.3 L
7.5 quarts AWD
8.0 quarts RWD
7.1 L AWD
7.6 L RWD
20.0 gallons
75.7 L
100 lb ft
(140 Y)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-109
Engine Specifications
Engine
5-110
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L HFV6 (LY7)
7
M82=Rear-Wheel Drive, 5L40-E
MX5=All-Wheel Drive, 5L40-E
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
4.6L PV8 (LH2)
A
M22=Rear-Wheel Drive, 5L50-E
MV3=All-Wheel Drive, 5L50-E
0.040 inches (1.0 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Maintenance Record .....................................6-14
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know exactly
how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-48.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads on page 4-17.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
6-3
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600
miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil on page 5-16 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within ten months
since vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on ten
months or more since the last service or if the message
has not come on at all for one year.
Service
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-58.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Service
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
An Emission Control Service.
For vehicles used for trailer towing:
Change transfer case fluid.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
6-6
25,000
(41 500)
•
50,000
(83 000)
•
75,000
(125 000)
•
100,000
(166 000)
•
125,000
(207 500)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, hood hinges, body door hinges, rear
compartment hinges and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
See Weatherstrips on page 5-94.
6-7
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-8
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-58 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to rotate or turn
the spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a
Flat Tire on page 5-78.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL
(N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. For the
proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on
page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25.
6-11
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Transfer Case
DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seats
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering
No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Front and Rear Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
Axle
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from you dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L HFV6
4.6L V8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
3.6L HFV6
4.6L V8
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side
22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side
21 inches (53.3 cm)
25728874
ACDelco® Part
Numbers
A2029C
25177917
89017342
25740404
PF2129
PF61
—
12565996
12571533
41-988
41-986
12367281
8-2221
88892785
8-2211
GM Part Numbers
6-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Service ...........................................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Records ...................................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-12
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre
in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Service
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period – 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge if
the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside
Service is available only in the United States and
Canada.
7-6
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing Service
Battery Jump Starting
Lock Out Assistance
Fuel Delivery
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
Trip Interruption – If your trip is interrupted due to a
warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals and rental car.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer
technician, if available, can travel to your location within a
30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have
your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. An experienced Roadside Service
Advisor will assist you and request the following
information:
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
mileage and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have
hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has
installed special telecommunication devices called Text
Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 – daily, 24 hours.
Courtesy Transportation
Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
7-7
Plan Ahead When Possible
Shuttle Service
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
7-8
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you
obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 a day
and must be supported by receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state,
local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to facilitate
repair of detected malfunctions; other information
is stored only in a crash or near crash event by
computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance data, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-10
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please check
the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for
information on its operations and data collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-12
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Owner’s Manual
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
7-13
✍ NOTES
7-14
A
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
(Base Audio System) ................................... 3-61
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-24
Activating Program Type (PTY) Stations
(RDS and XM™) ....................................... 3-103
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-37
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-100
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-23
Adjusting the Second Row Seat ......................... 1-7
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ............. 3-100
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-31
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-40
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-50
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-60
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-57
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-60
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates? .................................................. 1-58
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-56
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-52
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ....... 7-10
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-48
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-29
AM ............................................................. 3-126
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System .................. 3-128
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-128
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-43
Anti-Pinch Feature .......................... 2-15, 2-49, 2-51
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-92
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-94
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-97
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-92
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-95
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-97
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-97
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-98
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-94
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-22
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-25
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-25
Assist Handles ............................................... 2-45
Audio Output ................................................ 3-121
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-94
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-124
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-127
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-127
Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-128
Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-111
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-95
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-94
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-124
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-126
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-128
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-24
Operation ................................................... 2-25
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-58
Battery .......................................................... 5-41
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7
Battery Saver Active ........................................ 3-65
Battery Voltage High ....................................... 3-65
Battery Voltage Low ........................................ 3-66
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-38
Before You Drive ........................................... 3-112
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-17
Brake
Panic Assist ................................................ 4-11
Parking ...................................................... 2-29
System Warning Light .................................. 3-42
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-40
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-38
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-23
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-40
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-40
2
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-51
Back-Up and License Plate Lamps ................. 5-55
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-54
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps .................. 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-51
Headlamps, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ..... 5-51
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-51
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-55
Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Sidemarker Lamps ................................... 5-54
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-73
C
Cadillac Owner Privileges™ ............................... 7-6
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-109
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-41, 4-54, 2-12, 2-32
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-94
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-127
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-127
Care of (cont.)
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-47
Cargo Management System ............................. 2-47
CD Messages ............................................... 3-110
Cell Phone Storage Area ................................. 2-45
Cellular Phone Usage .................................... 3-126
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-45
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-54
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-77
Change Engine Oil .......................................... 3-66
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid .................... 3-67
Charging System Light .................................... 3-41
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-46
Check Brake Fluid .......................................... 3-67
Check Coolant Level ....................................... 3-67
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-46
Check Gas Cap .............................................. 3-67
Check Oil Level .............................................. 3-66
Check Tire Pressure ........................................ 3-66
Check Washer Fluid ........................................ 3-67
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-39
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-26
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-60
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-97
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-31
Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-42
Older Children ............................................. 1-28
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position .................................................. 1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-47
Top Strap ................................................... 1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-41
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38
Cigarette Lighter ..................................... 3-25, 3-26
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-92
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-95
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Video Screen ............................................ 3-127
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-94
Your DVD Player ....................................... 3-127
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..... 5-96
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-95
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-92
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-94
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-94
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-93
Cleaning the Mirror ................................. 2-34, 2-37
Cleaning the Speaker Covers ........................... 5-94
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-93
3
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-97
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-93
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-96
Cleaning Wood Panels .................................... 5-94
Climate Control System
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-35
Dual .......................................................... 3-26
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-32
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................ 3-34
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-91
Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-35
Compass Operation ......................................... 2-35
Compass Variance .......................................... 2-36
Configurable Radio Display Keys ..................... 3-110
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-47
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-45
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-44
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control ........................................ 3-12, 3-18
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-50
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-45
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-13
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
4
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-11
Roadside Service .......................................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-18
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-31
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions (Base Audio
System) ..................................................... 3-62
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-47
Diversity Antenna System ............................... 3-128
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-48
Door
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Door (cont.)
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Driver Door Ajar ............................................. 3-67
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-52
DIC Main Menu ........................................... 3-61
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-74
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-65
Status of Vehicle Systems ............................ 3-53
System Controls .......................................... 3-52
Driver Shift Control (DSC) ................................ 2-28
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-31
City ........................................................... 4-36
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-39
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-33
Winter ........................................................ 4-41
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-27
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-29
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-30
Driving on Grades ........................................... 4-59
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-21
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-41
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-35
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-35
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-22
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-58
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-26
DVD
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-127
Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-127
Distortion .................................................. 3-126
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-112
DVD Player .................................................. 3-112
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-63
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-41
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-100
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-100
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5-100
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-100
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ................................................... 3-48
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-22
Battery ....................................................... 5-41
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-46
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24
5
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-45
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-44
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-32
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Overheating ................................................ 5-27
Starting ...................................................... 2-23
Engine Coolant Hot – AC
(Air Conditioning) Off .................................... 3-68
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine ..................... 3-68
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-60
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-19
Engine Overheated – Stop Engine .................... 3-68
Engine Power Reduced ................................... 3-68
Engine Specifications ..................................... 5-110
Engine Speed Limiter ...................................... 3-40
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat ................ 1-7
Entering the Personalization Menu ..................... 3-74
Entertainment System
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-127
Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-127
DVD Distortion .......................................... 3-126
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-21
Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-19
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-44
Event Data Records (EDR) .............................. 7-10
Exiting the Personalization Menu ....................... 3-93
Express-Down Window .................................... 2-14
6
Express-Up Window ........................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ..........................
2-14
1-27
3-18
3-20
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22
Finding a Station ............................................ 3-97
Finish Care .................................................... 5-95
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-97
Flash-To-Pass Feature ....................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-78
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-24
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
FM Stereo .................................................... 3-126
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-50
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-11
Following Distance .......................................... 4-58
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-50
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-51
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Fuel Level Low ............................................... 3-68
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-100
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-100
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-45
Fuel .......................................................... 3-51
Speedometer .............................................. 3-38
Tachometer ................................................. 3-39
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-40
Garment Hooks .............................................. 2-45
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-43
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-19
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-45
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-9
Headlamp Washers ......................................... 3-17
Headlamps ............................................ 3-10, 3-18
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-51
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps .................. 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-51
Headlamps, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ..... 5-51
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-51
Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-54
Headlamps Suggested ..................................... 3-69
Headphones ................................................. 3-119
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-50
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-39
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-39
Hitches .......................................................... 4-57
7
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-40
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-41
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-7
How the System Works ................................... 3-23
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-32
How to Check ................................................ 5-69
How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-49
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-36
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-23
How to Reset the Change Transmission Fluid
Message and the Transmission
Fluid Indicator ............................................. 5-24
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-35
8
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
I
Ice Possible ...................................................
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ..........
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...............
If the Light is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-47
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-43
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-45
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer ...................... 4-55
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-18
Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-19
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-31
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-68
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-37
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-21
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-21
3-69
5-29
5-28
3-47
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-14,
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ......
Left Rear Door Ajar .........................................
Level Control ..................................................
Lift Gate Ajar .................................................
Liftgate ..........................................................
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Lights On Reminder .....................................
3-18
3-21
1-23
1-42
1-44
2-11
2-30
3-69
4-53
3-69
2-12
3-40
3-43
3-42
3-41
3-50
3-44
3-50
3-50
3-50
Light (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-46
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-48
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-40
Security ..................................................... 3-49
Sport Mode ................................................ 3-49
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-44
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-45
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-44
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror ............................... 2-16
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-48
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-18
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-46
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
9
M
Magnetic Ride Control ..................................... 4-10
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-60
Making Turns ................................................. 4-58
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-46
Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-2
Map Pocket ................................................... 2-45
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6
Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-52
10
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-52
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-65
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ....... 7-5
Mirror Operation ..................................... 2-34, 2-35
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®
and Compass .......................................... 2-34
Memory ..................................................... 2-52
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-38
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-38
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-37
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System ................................ 3-111
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-38
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-48
Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine ....................... 3-69
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-40
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-39
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-40
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-39
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-40
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads .............................................. 4-17
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-7
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-32
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-38
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-38
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-37
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-13
Panic Brake Assist .......................................... 4-11
Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-21
Park Aid ........................................................ 3-22
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-31
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 3-22
Brake ........................................................ 2-29
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-59
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-35
Passenger Door Ajar ....................................... 3-69
Passing ................................................. 4-14, 4-58
Personalization Features .................................. 3-75
Personalization Off/Driver Identification
(Navigation System) ..................................... 3-69
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8
Playing the Radio ........................................... 3-96
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-24
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-100
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
11
Power (cont.)
Windows ....................................................
Power Steering ...............................................
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ...........
Programming the Power Windows .....................
2-14
4-12
1-27
2-10
2-41
2-15
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13
R
Radio Data System (RDS) ............................... 3-95
Radio Message ............................................. 3-103
Radios .......................................................... 3-94
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-127
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-127
Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-111
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-95
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-94
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-124
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-126
RDS Messages ............................................. 3-101
Reaching Roadside Service ............................... 7-7
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-22
12
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................... 3-34
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-49
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-25
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-112
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Passenger Positions ......................... 1-22
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger’s Side) ..................................... 5-107
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver’s Side) ........................................... 5-105
Rear Washer/Wiper ......................................... 3-17
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-32
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® ..................................................... 2-34
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-34
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-47
Remote Control ............................................. 3-116
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-84
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-79
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-55
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-40
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ..................................................... 1-61
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-11
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-44
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-44
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-61
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-60
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-61
Resynchronization ................................... 2-49, 2-51
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-21
Right Rear Door Ajar ....................................... 3-70
Roadside
Service ........................................................ 7-6
Roadside Service Availability .............................. 7-7
Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech
Impaired ...................................................... 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-46
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-33
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-27
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-40
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-94
Driver Position ............................................ 1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-25
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-22
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-21
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-57
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-20
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
13
Seats (cont.)
Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-2
Memory ..................................................... 2-52
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Stowable Seat .............................................. 1-7
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-81
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-44
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-44
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-47
Security Light ................................................. 3-49
Sensors ......................................................... 3-30
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-46
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System ................ 3-70
Service Air Bag .............................................. 3-70
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-13
Service Charging System ................................. 3-70
Service Electrical System ................................. 3-70
Service Fuel System ....................................... 3-70
14
Service Idle Control ......................................... 3-70
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-12
Service Stability System Message ..................... 3-71
Service Steering System .................................. 3-71
Service Suspension System ............................. 3-72
Service Theft System ...................................... 3-72
Service Tire Monitor System ............................. 3-72
Service Transmission ....................................... 3-72
Service Vehicle Soon ...................................... 3-72
Setting Preset Stations .................................... 3-98
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-94
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......................... 3-99
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-97
Shift Lock Release .......................................... 2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-31
Skidding ........................................................ 4-16
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-35
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-109
Speedometer .................................................. 3-38
Sport Mode Light ............................................ 3-49
Stabilitrak® System ......................................... 4-10
Stability System Engaged Message ................... 3-71
Stability System Off Message ........................... 3-71
Stability System Ready Message ....................... 3-71
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-28
Starting Disabled – Remove Key ....................... 3-72
Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem .................. 3-72
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-23
Status of Vehicle Systems, DIC ........................ 3-53
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering Column Ignition Lock Release .............. 2-22
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-13
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-12
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-124
Stereo RCA Jacks ......................................... 3-120
Storage
Garment Hooks ........................................... 2-45
Storage Areas
Cargo Management System .......................... 2-47
Cell Phone Storage Area .............................. 2-45
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-45
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-47
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-45
Glove Box .................................................. 2-45
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-46
Map Pocket ................................................ 2-45
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-87
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-89
Stowable Seat .................................................. 1-7
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-45
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
Sunroof ................................................. 2-48, 2-50
System Controls, DIC ...................................... 3-52
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-39
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Sidemarker
Lamps .................................................... 5-54
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-44
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-18
Theft Attempted .............................................. 3-72
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-124
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-18
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-19
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-23
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-45
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-59
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-66
Tires ............................................................. 5-58
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-73
Chains ....................................................... 5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-78
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-91
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-68
15
Tires (cont.)
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-72
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-75
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-72
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-24
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off ................................ 3-73
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-41
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-31
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-57
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-47
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-54
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-47
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-44
Magnetic Ride Control .................................. 4-10
Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-10
Traction Engaged ............................................ 3-73
Traction Suspended ........................................ 3-73
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-57
Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine .............. 3-73
Transfer Case ................................................ 5-48
16
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-24
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-12
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-19
Trip Odometers .............................................. 3-38
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal On ............................................... 3-73
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-59
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-22
Underhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-101
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-126
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-74
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-76
Using DSP ................................................... 3-100
Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-44
Using the Recovery Hook ................................ 4-46
Using the Single CD Player ............................ 3-106
Using the Six-CD CD Changer ........................ 3-107
V
W
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-48
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records .............................................. 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-99
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-99
Vehicle Information Menu Item Descriptions ........ 3-56
Vehicle Information Menu
(Base Audio System) ................................... 3-54
Vehicle Information Menu
(Navigation System) ..................................... 3-55
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-74
Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................. 2-52
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-32
Video Screen ................................................ 3-116
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-36
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-65
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-7
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-95
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-55
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-56
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-18
What to Add .................................................. 5-39
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-22
What to Use .......................... 5-26, 5-36, 5-37, 5-49
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-75
Replacement ............................................... 5-75
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-17
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-20
When to Check .............................................. 5-69
When to Check Lubricant ................................. 5-49
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-36
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ........ 5-23
17
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill ..................................................... 4-60
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-10
Window Lockout ............................................. 2-16
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-16
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-56
Fuses ...................................................... 5-100
Windshield Wiper Lever ................................... 3-15
Windshield Wipers .......................................... 3-15
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-41
Winter Tires ................................................... 5-59
18
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-128
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(48 Contiguous US States) .................. 3-96, 3-126
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2